ACTIVE INDEX - Sign in to the PHD Distributor Support Sitedistributor.phdinc.com/PDF/TDB.pdf · Catalog 2005 Updates ... Rod Bushing Movement ... ACTIVE INDEX PHD TECHNICAL DATA BULLETINS

BULLETIN NO. DESCRIPTION OF BULLETIN BULLETIN DATE

CYLINDERS: C15 .......Revised Seal Material and Life Rating ................................................................................................................................................ 1-27-05 C16 .......Discontinuing Series CMx Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinders .................................................................................................. 12-9-14

ROTARY ACTUATORS: R7 .........Series RI Dimension Corrections ........................................................................................................................................................ 12-5-01 R8 .........Rotary Actuator Shock Absorber Upgrade .......................................................................................................................................... 8-19-04 R9 .........Series RA Shock Absorber Dimension and Load Changes ................................................................................................................11-18-04 R10 .......Series RFS Application Unit Orientation Recommendation/Warning .................................................................................................. 2-20-12

MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS: M5 ........Discontinuing Series MCS Multi-Motion Actuators .............................................................................................................................. 6-30-15

SLIDES: SL32 .....Design Change to Series SGxM Slides ................................................................................................................................................. 3-5-02 SL33 .....Revised SHP Slide Selection Data ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-15-02 SL34 .....Design Change to the Series SG Slide ................................................................................................................................................11-1-02 SL35 .....Series SM Slide Accessories Page Missing from CAT06 .................................................................................................................... 2-27-06 SL36 .....Shock Absorber Availability on Classic Slides ....................................................................................................................................... 5-4-10 SL37 .....Design Change to Metric Series SG Slides (9) ..................................................................................................................................11-30-12 SL38 .....Discontinuing Series SJP Slides ........................................................................................................................................................... 5-2-14

GRIPPERS: G14.......Part Ejector/Spring Assist Added to Series GRTx1 ............................................................................................................................... 6-9-00 G15.......Design Change to Series GRB .......................................................................................................................................................... 10-15-02 G16.......Series GRB Gripper Corrected Engineering Data ............................................................................................................................... 2-14-03 G17.......New Switch Kit Numbers for Series GRS/GRF Grippers ...................................................................................................................... 5-5-05 G18.......Higher Grip Forces for GRK Grippers ................................................................................................................................................... 7-1-09 G19.......New -STT99 Coupled Jaw Position Sensor Option ............................................................................................................................. 6-25-12 G20.......Discontinuing Series 8400 Parallel Grippers ......................................................................................................................................... 5-2-14 G21.......Discontinuing Series EGP Electromechanical Grippers ...................................................................................................................... 12-9-14

SWITCHES AND SENSORS: SW18....63549-xx Cordsets ................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-9-00 SW19....Incorrect Wiring Schematic Label ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-24-03 SW20....Metal Proximity Switch Mounting Brackets For Use With Series 1750 Switches .................................................................................. 6-4-03 SW21....Legacy Switches and Cordsets ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-25-12 SW22....Legacy Large Bore Switch Brackets ................................................................................................................................................... 8-21-12 SW23 ...Phase Out of 13109-02-6 3 Amp Reed Switch .................................................................................................................................... 3-27-15 SW24 ...Environmental Protection JC1STP Switch .......................................................................................................................................... 3-21-16 SW25....Discontinuing Series 5142 Switch Brackets .........................................................................................................................................7-11-16 SW26....Discontinuing Series 15561-xxx 12 mm Threaded DC Inductive Proximity Switch ............................................................................. 7-19-17

COMMON/UNIVERSAL: C/U15 ...Seal Specification Change .................................................................................................................................................................. 9-20-01 C/U16 ...Hydraulic Pressure Rating Change on Series 5000 & 6000 Multi-Motion & Rotary Actuators ............................................................ 6-19-03 C/U17 ...Catalog 2005 Updates ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-25-05

PPC: PPC1 ....Fixed Orifice for Series BCZ Nozzle Cylinders ...................................................................................................................................11-18-04 PPC2 ....Preform Eject Slide Valve Connector Rewiring ..................................................................................................................................... 3-9-05 PPC3 ....Rod Bushing Movement ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-5-05 PPC4 ....Design Change on BCZ Nozzle Cylinders ............................................................................................................................................ 7-7-05 PPC5 ....Rod Seal Leakage - Alps Leak Test Cylinder .................................................................................................................................... 10-25-05 PPC6 ....Design 7 Change on BCZ Nozzle Cylinders ......................................................................................................................................... 1-4-06 PPC7 ....BCS25 and BCS26 Check Valve Failure ............................................................................................................................................... 1-5-06 PPC8 ....Maintenance Instructions for Series1 Blow Nozzle Cylinders ..............................................................................................................11-3-06 PPC9 ....New Option -X26 Replaces Old Option -X23 ...................................................................................................................................... 10-4-07 PPC10 ..New Molded Yellow Seal on -X27 Replaces Old Seal ......................................................................................................................... 1-12-15 PPC11 ..Discontinuing Series FCA Filler Cylinder ..............................................................................................................................................7-11-16 PPC12 ..BST2x2-5 Cam Bearing Wheel Replacement .................................................................................................................................... 9-26-17 PPC13 ..Discontinuing Design 7 of BCZ2 Sidel Series2 Nozzle Cylinders and Kits .................................................................................11-1-17

CLAMPS: CL1 .......Series PLM Switch Cable Connection Direction ................................................................................................................................. 4-18-06 CL2 .......New Series PLK Design Replaces Design 1 and 5 ............................................................................................................................. 7-19-17

PHD PLUS®: PHDP1 .Series ECV, ESK/ESL, ESG Engineering Data, Life Charts, and Equations .....................................................................................12-21-11

PHD Optimax®: OPT1 ....Series OCG Cylinder Switch Bracket Change .................................................................................................................................... 4-25-16

ACTIVE INDEXPHD TECHNICAL DATA BULLETINS INDEX ISSUE DATE: 11-1-17

Note: Titles shown in bold type are the newest Technical Data Bulletins.

FILE UNDER CYLINDERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER

TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C1

DATE: 4-1-91 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: HV, 3/4", 1", 1-1/8"

SAE ports are now available on 3/4" 1", and 1-1/8" bore Tom Thumb 'HV' Series Cylinders as astandard option. The new option letter is -Y. In order to incorporate an SAE port, it was necessary toutilize a brazed-on adaptor on the head and cap. The drawing below shows the adaptor dimensionsand port size.

The SAE port option -Y has the following limitations:•Not available on cylinders with 'F' mounting style.•Not available with Port Position 3 on a unit with 'B' mounting style.•Not available on a 3/4" bore with either 'T' or 'L' mount with oversized rod.

Catalog '91 contains this option.Price adder for SAE ports on 3/4", 1", 1-1/8" bore 'HV' Cylinders is $25.00

SAE ports are available on other PHD products. Consult the factory for specific sizes and pricing.

REQUIRED ACTION:As the demand increases for SAE ports, make sure your customers are aware of PHD's continuingeffort to supply cylinders and actuators with SAE ports to meet their requirements.

PHD, Inc. • 10216 Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN 46899 U.S.A. • Phone (219) 747-6151 • Fax (219) 747-6754

1

4

2

3

.650

.625 DIA.

7/16-20 S.A.E. PORT THREAD2 PLACES

.132


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 4-24-91 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: A, AV, HV (MEDIUM DUTY)

The inside diameters of cushion blocks will be opened up to eliminate the possibility of interferencebetween the spud diameter and the thru hole of the cushion block. You may have noticed this if alarge load was put on the rod and then cycled with cushions, a clanking noise may be heard or ashake of the rod may be seen, usually on the cap end.

The drawings for all blocks have been changed and any new blocks will be changed. Estimated timeof complete changeover will be in July of 1991.

PISTON CUSHION "SPUD"

If any of your customers have experienced the above mentioned problem, make them aware of theimproved design.



REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 5-2-91 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: A, AV

An improved cushion design is now being used on the 3/4", 1", and 1-1/8" bore Series A and AVCylinders. The improvements include:

• Elimination of the traditional ball check with the checking device built into the cushion needle.(See illustration)

• The thread on the adjusting needle has been changed from 40 to 72 threads per inch.

• The shape of the needle has been redesigned.

The result is a much more consistent and reliable cushion which now has an adjustment range atminimum 2 times greater than our original cushion.

There is no additional charge for this new and improved design. All units shipped after May 1, 1991will contain this new design.

All Repair Kits will come with parts to rebuild both the old style and new design cushions. Aninstruction card will indicate which parts the customer should use to rebuild his specific unit.

Inform your customers of this new design and use the above information to sell them on thebenefits.

NEEDLE CHECK SEAL

FREE FLOW THROUGHCENTER HOLE AND

CROSS DRILLED ORIFICE



REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 1-15-92 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: TOM THUMB MEDIUM AND

HEAVY DUTY CYLINDERS

None required.


Two Wrench Flats on -I Female Rod EndCatalog 91 indicates that all PHD Cylinder rod ends are manufactured with four wrench flats. Wehave found that this design does not work well with the -I style four female rod end due to materialthickness and rod strength. For this reason all cylinders with the -I option will have only two wrenchflats. This change will be reflected in future catalogs.

TWO WRENCH FLATS FOUR WRENCH FLATS

-I FEMALEROD END

ALL OTHERCYLINDER ROD ENDS


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 6-11-93 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: COMPACT OVAL

Inform all your Compact Oval Cylinder customers of this material change.

PHD, Inc. • 9009 Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN 46899 U.S.A. • Phone (219) 747-6151 • Fax (219) 747-6754

Compact Oval Rod Material ChangeStarting August 1, 1993, the standard rod material for all Compact Oval Cylinders will be 303stainless steel in place of the original chrome plated steel rod material. This change provides acorrosion resistant shaft on this aluminum bodied cylinder.

After August 1, customers requiring the original chrome plated steel must specify Option -R2.

Compact Oval CylinderStainless Steel RodEffective August 1, 1993


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 7-16-93 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: COMPACT OVAL

None


Compact Oval Rod MaterialUntil further notice, compact oval rod material will remain chrome plated steel. This TechnicalBulletin supersedes Bulletin C5 dated 6-11-93.

PHD will continue testing to evaluate the best materials and processes to provide our customers withthe highest value in cylinders and actuators.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 8-16-93 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: A, AV

None


“F” Mount Bracket Used With Stroke Adjustment

Tom Thumb 3/4", 1", and 1-1/8" bore A & AV Series Cylinders are now available with “F” (MS8)mounting and stroke adjustment as a standard product. In the past, these were handled as acustom product, because of the interference between the stroke adjustment screw and thetraditional mounting hole or “F Tab” on the cap.

The standard configuration will now incorporate an “F Bracket”, which is now being used on doublerod end cylinders with “F” (MS8) mounting. Unless otherwise specified, this will be the standardconfiguration anytime an “F” Mount is specified with stroke adjustment (-A).

“F” MOUNTINGBRACKET FROMDOUBLE ROD END CYLINDER

STROKE ADJUSTMENTSCREW



DATE: 8-16-93 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDER ROD COUPLERSPAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: 19200 ROD COUPLERS


Cylinder Rod Coupler ConversionPHD no longer offers the series 19200 Rod Couplers. Listed below is a cross reference to assist inconverting these couplers to other PHD Rod Couplers or to TRD brand couplers:

DISCONTINUED AVAILABLETHD SIZE PHD PN# STD PHD PT# TRD PN#

1/4-28 19200-01 250* AC-2505/16-24 19200-02 312* AC-3123/8-24 19200-03 375* AC-3753/8-16 19200-04 AC-375-C

7/16-20 19200-05 437* AC-4371/2-20 19200-06 500* AC-5001/2-13 19200-07 AC-500-C5/8-18 19200-08 625* AC-6253/4-16 19200-09 750* AC-7503/4-10 19200-10 AC-750-C7/8-14 19200-11 AC-8751-14 19200-12 AC-10001-8 19200-13 AC-1000-C

1-1/4-12 19200-14 AC-12501-3/8-12 19200-15 AC-13751-1/2-15 19200-16 AC-15001-3/4-12 19200-17 AC-1250

*These PHD Couplers contain the same thread size but are not dimensionally interchangeable. SeePage 2 of this Technical Data Bulletin for a dimensional comparison.



DATE: 8-16-93 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDER ROD COUPLERSPAGE 2 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: 19200 ROD COUPLERS


REQUIRED ACTION:Use this information to convert Series 19200 Couplers to other coupler models.

Standard PHD Couplers (Still Available)

Series 19200 Couplers (Discontinued)

Dimensional Comparison

Shaded dimensions indicate dimensional differences between models.

1° ANGULAR COMPENSATION

.032 LATERAL COMPENSATION

F DIA

A INTERNAL THREADx E DEEP A THREAD

CL

B

DC

G

F DIA

A INTERNAL THREADx E DEEP A THREAD

CL

B

DC

G

2° ANGULAR COMPENSATION

.032 LATERAL COMPENSATION

B1.0001.0001.0001.5001.5001.5001.812

C.625.625.625.750.750.7501.125

D1.8751.8751.8752.7502.7502.7503.438

E.625.625.625.750.750.7501.125

F.875.875.8751.2501.2501.2501.750

G.156.187.219.250.312.375.421

A1/4-285/16-243/8-247/16-201/2-205/8-183/4-16

B1.0001.0001.0001.1251.1251.7501.750

C.625.625.625.750.7501.1251.125

D1.8751.8751.8752.1872.1873.3123.312

E.500.500.500.500.500.812.812

F.875.875.8751.0001.0001.5621.562

G.156.187.219.250.312.375.421

A1/4-285/16-243/8-247/16-201/2-205/8-183/4-16

MODELNO.

19200-0119200-0219200-0319200-0519200-0619200-0819200-09

MODELNO.

250312375437500625750

LETTER DIMENSION

LETTER DIMENSION


REQUIRED ACTION: NONE.


DATE: 9-1-95 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: AV,HV,A


NEW SPRING RETURN SPRING RATES ON MEDIUM DUTY CYLINDERSThe published spring rates for option "SR" Spring Return and option "SC" Spring Extend havechanged to more truly reflect the performance characteristics of the cylinders. The spring rates for0"-3" stroke range remain unchanged at a 4 lb. preload and a 7 lb./in. spring rate. Cylinders with a3 1/4" -6" stroke range now have a cataloged 2 lb. preload and a 3 1/2 lb./in. spring rate. This changewill be reflected in PHD's new catalog 96.

SPRING RATESSTROKE0" - 3"

3 1/4" - 6"

RATE7 lbs./in.

3 1/2 lbs./in.

PRELOAD4 lbs.2 lbs.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 12-8-95 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 3/4", 1", 1-1/8" AV, HV, A

None.


Modifications To Eye Brackets and Clevis BracketsPHD is removing the mounting screw counterbores on all eye brackets and clevis brackets for use on3/4", 1", 1-1/8" bore Tom Thumb Medium Duty Cylinders. This change will have NO effect on themounting dimensions, required hardware, or mounting attachment performance. The “mountingflange” portion of these attachments has been redesigned and narrowed by the depth of the previouscounterbores. This change is being made to improve the quality and appearance of these mountingattachments. These modified parts will be phased in as existing inventory runs out.

BORESIZE

LETTER DIMENSION

3/41 &

1-1/8

A,AV,HVA

AV,HV

CYLSERIES

PARTNO.

1077-011077-021077-03

AB.750

1.0001.000

CB2.48.373.373

CD.250.250.375

DD#6

#10#10

E1.0001.3751.375

BORESIZE

LETTER DIMENSION

A,AV,HVA

AV,HV

CYLSERIES

KITNO.

129011290212903

AB.750

1.0001.000

CB.254.379.379

CC.750.875.875

CD.250.250.375

CD1.250.375.375

3/41 &

1-1/8

DD#6

#10#10

E1.0001.3751.375

FL1.1871.2501.250

L.500.531.531

CB.312.937

EYE BRACKET

CLEVIS BRACKET - PIN INCLUDED

.577

.750 DIA.

THRU HOLE FOR DDSHCS 4 PLACES

ABSQ.

ESQ.

ESQ.CC DIA

THRU HOLE FOR DDSHCS 4 PLACES

ABSQ.

CB

.360

LCD1FL

CD DIA. THRU

CD DIA. THRU


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 2-9-96 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: H3V (Hydraulic 3-position)

Inform customers as necessary.


Proper Valving CriticalPHD has identified a potential problem concerning improper valving of Series H3V Cylinders in thefield. If not valved properly, extreme pressure intensification can occur in cylinder #1. Pressures of5000 psi can be created causing catastrophic cylinder failure. PHD has added a caution statement inCatalog 96 and will be including a product packer addressing this issue on future orders.

OIL OIL

CYLINDER #1 CYLINDER #2

2) Center port must be open totank. If blocked, cylinder #1becomes an intensifier.

1) Rear port being pressurized.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 12-30-96 PRODUCT TYPE: RODLESS CYLINDERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES CE

Inform customers who are users of the affected models.


Series CE Kinetic Energy RevisionsFollowing is revised data concerning the shock absorber specification chart found on page 15 ofcatalog CE01 and kinetic energy graphs on page 14. In both cases, the changes affect only the 25and 32 mm bore size units. Highlighted (shaded) areas denote changes.

PHDSHOCK

ABSORBERKIT NUMBER*

61088-02-00-xx

61088-03-00-xx

61088-04-00-xx

BORE[mm]

253240506380

THREADTYPE

M20 x 1.5

M25 x 1.5

M25 x 1.5

SHOCK ABSORBER SPECIFICATION CHART

*For 25 & 32 mm bore units, see Graph 1 on page 16; for 40 & 50 mm, see Graph 2; for 63 & 80 mm, see Graph 3.

SSTROKEin

.88

1.00

1.56

mm

22.4

25.4

39.6

SHOCKABSORBER

WEIGHTlb

.44

.62

1.00

kg

.20

.28

.45

ET

TOTALENERGY/CYCLE

in-lb60112190310620885

Nm6.812.721.535.070.0100.0

in-lb

475000

622000

670000

Nm

53700

70000

75700

ETCTOTAL

ENERGY/HOUR

FD

PROPELLINGFORCE

lb

200

350

500

N

890

1550

2224

00

00

25 mm 32 mm

EFFECTIVE MOVING WEIGHT lb [kg]

VELO

CITY

ft/s

ec [m

/sec

]

VELO

CITY

ft/s

ec [m

/sec

]

EFFECTIVE MOVING WEIGHT lb [kg]

.5[.15]

2.0[.61]

.5[.15]

1.0[.30]

3.0[.91]

2.5[.76]

1.5[.46]

30[13.61]

20[9.07]

10[4.54]

50[22.68]

40[18.14]

60[27.22]

1.0[.30]

60[27.22]

20[9.07]

40[18.14]

80[36.29]

100[45.36]

MAXIMUM KINETIC ENERGY GRAPHS

30[13.61]

10[4.54]

50[22.68]

70[31.75]

90[40.82]

2.5[.76]

2.0[.61]

1.5[.46]


DATE: 8-18-97 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES CT


REQUIRED ACTION:Make sure fastener kits ordered are correct dependent on date the cylinder was manufactured.


CT Cylinder Fastener Kit Modification

Due to PHD’s supplier ceasing production, effective 8/4/97 PHD has changed the length of thefastener which secures the tool plate to the piston rod on Series CTS and CTD 50 and 63 mm borecompact cylinders. To accommodate the longer fastener, the piston rod tap drill depths have beenmodified to a deeper thread. A new fastener kit no. (see below) has been created and should beordered for units built after 8/4/97. Inventory of the old fastener kits will remain available and must beordered for units built prior to 8/4/97.

QTY PART DESCRIPTION1* Seal Kit, All1* Repair Kit Std

-BB1 Fastener Kit

QTY PART DESCRIPTION1* Seal Kit, All1* Repair Kit Std

-BB1 Fastener Kit

60427-01-x60428-01-1-x60428-01-2-x60429-01-1

12 mm 16 mm 20 mm 25 mm 32 mm 40 mm 50 mm 63 mm60427-03-x

60428-03-1-x60428-03-2-x60429-02-1

60427-05-x60428-05-1-x60428-05-2-x60429-03-1

60427-07-x60428-07-1-x60428-07-2-x60429-04-1

60427-09-x60428-09-1-x60428-09-2-x60429-05-1

60427-11-x60428-11-1-x60428-11-2-x60429-06-1

60427-13-x60428-13-1-x60428-13-2-x60429-07-160429-09-1

CHART 1 - CTS CYLINDER (SINGLE ROD)

60427-02-x60428-02-1-x60428-02-2-x60429-01-1

60427-04-x60428-04-1-x60428-04-2-x60429-02-1

60427-06-x60428-06-1-x60428-06-2-x60429-03-1

60427-08-x60428-08-1-x60428-08-2-x60429-04-1

60427-10-x60428-10-1-x60428-10-2-x60429-05-1

60427-12-x60428-12-1-x60428-12-2-x60429-06-1

60427-14-x60428-14-1-x60428-14-2-x60429-07-160429-09-1

60427-16-x60428-16-1-x60428-16-2-x60429-08-160429-10-1

CHART 2 - CTD CYLINDER (DOUBLE ROD)12 mm 16 mm 20 mm 25 mm 32 mm 40 mm 50 mm 63 mm

60427-15-x60428-15-1-x60428-15-2-x60429-08-160429-10-1New kit # for units built after 8/4/97

New kit # for units built after 8/4/97

Fastener screw has been changedfrom a M10 x 1.5 x 16 mm to a

M10 x 1.5 x 20 mm on all 50 and63 mm bore units built after 8/4/97.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 7/10/98 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES CV

Note this correction in your catalog and inform potential uses of the 80 mm size Rodlok option.


RODLOKTM Holding Force

The static locking force shown on page 9 of catalog CV01 (ISO Cylinders) for the 80 mm boresize has been revised. The correct force is indicated below in the outlined area of the table.

STATIC LOCKING FORCEBORE[mm]

3240506380100

lb1352253374956741124

[N]60010001500220030005000

FILE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER

REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 1-27-05 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: CRS


Inform your customers of these changes and the superior life rating.

REVISED SEAL MATERIAL AND LIFE RATING

The following information has been revised in Catalog 2005 in regards to the New Generation Series CRS Cylinder design:

1. PHD has upgraded the piston seal material used on the New Generation Series CRS Cylinder to a self lubricating nitrile compound.

Below is the revised cutaway graphic, which replaces the one on page 1-3 of Catalog 2005. The shaded area reflects the seal material change.

2. As a result of enhanced seal material and confirmed unit life testing for the New Generation Series CRS Cylinder, PHD has increased the cylinder'spublished life rating to 70 million linear inches of travel.

Below is the revised specification chart, which replaces the one on page 1-5 of Catalog 2005. The shaded area shows changes from the old specification.

stainless steel bore plug

optional shock pads add nolength to cylinder, extend cylinder

life, and minimize noise atend of piston travel

clear anodized extrudedbody enables flushmounting of Series 6790Switches on up to threesides of cylinder

thru and threaded holesfor easy cylinder mounting

compact design is ideal forapplications requiring powerin a small package

self-lubricating nitrile piston sealprovides long life and supports

piston to help reduce rod free play

aluminum bushings with PTFE filled hardcoatprovide maximum wear resistance for long life

hard chrome-platedsteel piston rodprovides maximum wearresistance for long life

SPECIFICATIONSOPERATING PRESSURESTROKE TOLERANCETEMPERATURE LIMITSVELOCITYLIFE EXPECTANCY

LUBRICATIONMAINTENANCE

SERIES CRS10 psi min to 150 psi max at zero load [0.7 bar min to 10 bar max] air

± 0.031 inch [± 0.8 mm]-20° to + 180°F [-28° to + 82°C]

20 in/sec [.5 m/sec] typical min, zero load at 100 psi [7 bar]70 million linear inches [1.77 million linear meters] minimum at operating temperatures under 120°F [49°C]

(-V1 & -Z1 options may reduce life)Pre-lubricated for use with non-lubricated or lubricated air

Field repairable

FILE UNDER ESCAPEMENTS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER

REQUIRED ACTION:

TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: E1

DATE: 4-3-91 PRODUCT TYPE: ESCAPEMENTPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES Z

The fastener (item 7) securing the piston and rod has been changed. Originally, a special buttonhead was used. It has been replaced with a stainless steel socket head cap screw. This changereduced costs and improved fatigue life. It became effective 1-1-89.

None.


11

12

13

1 3

754

8

6

910

2

ROD WITHSWITCH MAGNET


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 10-1-91 PRODUCT TYPE: ESCAPEMENTSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES Z, WITH STROKE ADJUSTMENT

None required.


Series Z Escapements have a new stroke adjustment seal design effective October 1, 1991. Thenew design incorporates a sealing washer instead of the seal as part of the jam nut. This changeallows PHD to reduce cost on a rather expensive part of the Escapement. Tests indicate there is noreduction in quality or reliability of the unit.

New Stroke Adjustment Seal

New design effective 10-1-91. Old Design


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 8-3-92 PRODUCT TYPE: ESCAPEMENTSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL SERIES Z ESCAPEMENTS

None required.


Updated Port Control® Design and Revised Standard SealsThe Series Z Escapement is the first of many PHD products to be updated to incorporate a new typeof check seal as part of the PHD Port Control®. The check seal is part of the port control needleassembly, eliminating the need for a separate ball check. This same check seal has been usedsuccessfully on many PHD products with cushions. This new design provides a more reliable checkfunction for more consistent speed control performance.

Also, all the standard seals throughout the unit will be Buna-N in place of Viton.

NEEDLE CHECK SEAL

FREE FLOW THROUGHCENTER HOLE AND

CROSS DRILLED ORIFICE

This new Port Control design and Buna-N seal change will be phased in as the current design partsare used up. Estimated date for phase-in of units with all Buna-N seals and the new Port Controlneedle is November 1.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 1-15-93 PRODUCT TYPE: ESCAPEMENTSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES Z

Change all new Escapement orders to “-1” Buna-N seals. If Viton is required it must be specified inwriting. Port Control check seal is not available in Viton.


Revised Standard Seal CompoundThe purpose of this Technical Data Bulletin is to clarify the seal compound change discussed onbulletin “E3”.

Starting January 15, 1993 all Series Z Escapement orders will automatically be converted to Buna-Nseals in place of the previously standard Viton seals. All orders should be placed with the last digit(seal compound) specified as “-1”.

These units are pneumatic only and are not recommended for use in temperatures beyond 180°F.The elimination of the Viton seals will not effect the performance of the units within this maximumtemperature rating.

16010 1 0 1 0

MODEL OPTIONS OPTIONS

DESIGN NO.

CAP OPTIONS0 - Standard Cap1 - Cap with flow controls and stroke adjustment2 - Cap with stroke adjustment only

1

SEALS

-

Model, Design No., and Options.

-

TO ORDER SPECIFY:

0-None 0-None 1 - Buna-N16010 -

16020 -

1/2" Bore1/2" Stroke3/4" Bore3/4" Stroke


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 12-8-95 PRODUCT TYPE: ESCAPEMENTSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES 160 (SERIES Z)

None.


DESIGN NUMBER CHANGE ON SERIES 160 ESCAPEMENTSDue to some internal changes to PHD's Series 160 (Series Z) Escapements, the design number isbeing changed from design 1 to design 2. These changes will be transparent to our customers anddistributors, but we wanted to identify these modifications with the design number change. Thedesign 2 units will start shipping in mid-December '95 as our inventory on design 1 parts runs out.PHD will automatically convert design 1 orders to the new design 2 units. PHD's complete Catalog96 as well as a new Escapement addendum will carry the design 2 designation.

TO ORDER SPECIFY:Series, Model, Design No., Rod End Option,Cap Option, Switch Ready Option, and Seals.

SEALS1 - Buna-N2 - Viton (Not offered with cap

options 2 & 3).

CAP OPTIONS0 - Standard Cap1 - Cap with flow controls and stroke adjustment2 - Cap with stroke adjustment onlyDESIGN NO.SERIES

10 - 2 - 0 1 1 1160

MODELIMPERIAL

10 - 1/2" Bore & Stroke withslotted mounting hole

20 - 3/4" Bore & Stroke withslotted mounting hole

METRIC11 - 12 mm Bore & Stroke with

slotted mounting hole21 - 20 mm Bore & Stroke with

slotted mounting hole

ROD END OPTIONS0 - Flats and threaded holes on all

four sides with a threaded holein the end on both rods.

SWITCH READY OPTIONS0 - None1 - Series 5360 Hall Effect Switch Ready

(Switch must be ordered separately.)

FILE UNDER ROTARY ACTUATORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER

REQUIRED ACTION:

TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: R2

DATE: 4-11-91 PRODUCT TYPE: MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 018050, 018075, 018375

If the actuator is exposed to an environment that may attack unfinished aluminum, a special unit maybe required.

Poor adhesion of loctite between the ball bearing and teflon hard coated aluminum body hasprompted the following change:

Bearing diameters will be masked so that no teflon hard coat material will be allowed to adhere to thealuminum. The only visible difference will be an unfinished bare aluminum area on the bearingdiameter between the face of the body and the snap ring.

UNCOATED



REQUIRED ACTION:Convert requests for Miniature Rotary Actuators for hydraulic service to Series 1000 units.


Hydraulic Miniature Rotary Actuators EliminatedPHD is no longer recommending our Miniature Rotary Actuators (0180751 and 0180752) forhydraulic service. These are currently rated at 500 psi hydraulic service in Catalog 91. We havefound the standard seals are not suitable for proper sealing of Hydraulic fluids. The volume of unitssold for hydraulic service has been very low. We recommend that customers requiring a hydraulicMiniature Rotary Actuator move up to a Series 1000 to ensure proper performance and satisfaction.

This change will be reflected in future catalogs.


DATE: 1-15-92 PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 0180751 & 0180752

MINIATURE ROTARY ACTUATORS


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 3-1-94 PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 1-8000 SERIES

Inform any customers who may have experienced -K option shaft failures of this productimprovement.


Improved Preloaded Keyway (-K) Shaft OptionA change has been made to the preloaded keyway pinion shaft option for all 1-8000 Series RotaryActuators. A .030" radius or chamfer has been added to the notch which is used for the preload setscrew.

This improvement is a result of feedback from some PHD customers who experienced prematurefailure of pinion shafts with the -K option. This radius adds strength to the shaft and brings moredurability to the -K option.

These improved preloaded keyways will be phased in as inventory permits. All units with -K optionshipped after March 1, 1994 should include this improved design.

NOTE: The supplied preload screw will also have a matched chamfer added to it to accommodatethe radius.

.030" RADIUS OR CHAMFER


DATE: 7-4-95 PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 2, 4, 6, 8000 Four Position Units


REQUIRED ACTION:Make this correction in your current catalog and inform all customers using four position RotaryActuators


Revised Four Position Backlash ToleranceThe backlash at end of rotation on a 2, 4, 6, or 8000 four position Rotary Actuator is more than

1 degree. Catalog 93 (page 3-24) indicates that double rack actuators have zero backlash at ends ofrotation when used with angle adjustments. While this is true of standard two position, three position,and five position units, it is incorrect for four position Rotary Actuators. This correction will be coveredin the next major catalog printing.

Four Position Unit


DATE: 8-29-97 PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES RA


REQUIRED ACTION:None


Improvement to Output Hub

PHD has revised the optional output hub (Q10 and Q19) available on Series RA Rotary Actuatorsfrom a double slot to a single slot design. This change increases the overall structural strength of thehub while having no effect dimensionally. The new single slot hubs will be phased in startingapproximately 8/26/97 and completed by approximately 12/31/97.

Slot eliminated on optional(Q10 & Q19) output hubs onSeries RA Rotary Actuators.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 12-5-01 PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORSPAGE 1 OF 3 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES RI

Inform potential customers of the Series RI of these revisions.


SERIES RI CORRECTIONSFollowing are revisions to Catalog 2002 dimensional data regarding the Series RI Rotary Actuator. Datahighlighted (shaded) indicates revised information. The effected catalog pages are indicated in the lower righthand corner.

BB

CC

RIxx25 RIxx32 RIxx50

A A

RIxx25 RIxx32 RIxx50

1.969[50]

2.520[64.0]3.150[80.0]

A1.378[35.0]1.811[46.0]2.283[58.0]

.472[12.0].610

[15.5].797

[20.2]

D.512

[13.0].630

[16.0].906

[23.0]

E.177[4.5].197[5.0].276[7.0]

FRIS125 & RID125RIS525 & RID525RIS132 & RID132RIS532 & RID532RIS150 & RID150RIS550 & RID550

UNIT10-32

M5 x 0.81/4-28

M6 x 1.05/16-24

M8 x 1.25

CLETTER DIMENSION

METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ].

B.2355[5.98].3147[7.99].3940

[10.01]

H45.045.030.030.022.522.5

L°90.090.060.060.045.045.0

K°1.575[40.0]1.811[46.0]2.362[60.0]

M10-32

M5 x 0.81/8-27 NPT

1/8-28 BSPP1/8-27 NPT

1/8-28 BSPP

N2.244[57.0]2.677[68.0]3.150[80.0]

P.197[5.0].276[7.0].433

[11.0]

J.026[.7].026[.7].039[1.0]

G

NOTE:1) PINION AND HUB SHOWN AT MID ROTATION.

.0003[.008].0003[.008].0003[.008]

H TOL ±.005[.13].005[.13].005[.13]

A TOL ±.197[5.0].315[8.0].354[9.0]

R

4X N CUSTOMER PORT 6X N CUSTOMER PORT8X N CUSTOMER PORT

6X Ø F x G DPO-RING INTERFACE

4X C THD x D DP


4X C THD x D DP

Ø P Ø P Ø P

Ø E

Ø E

L°

4X K°

L°

6X K°

L°

8X K°

Ø JØ J

4X (G) 6X (G)8X (G)

2X Ø H x R DP2X Ø H x R DP

Ø BØ B

Ø MØ M

Ø M

Ø AØ A

6 235

1

4

8 347

1 2

56

4 3

21

5 326

4

1

7 438

6 5

21


1

4X C THD x D DP

Ø E Ø J 2X Ø H x R DP

Ø B

Ø A

2

34

L°

4X K°

L°

6X K°

L°

8X K°

PRESSURE OUTPUT HUB O-RING INTERFACE

PRESSURE INPUT PORT INTERFACE

Refer to Catalog 2002, Page 3D-6



DATE: 8-19-04 PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES RI & RA


.200[5.1].240[6.1].310[7.9]

A2.847[72.3]3.263[82.9]3.924[99.7]

.770[19.6]1.100[27.9]1.360[34.5]

DRISx125RISx525RISx132RISx532RISx250RISx650

UNITSIZE

.551[14.0].787

[20.0].984

[25.0]

CLETTER DIMENSION

METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ].NOTE: FOR RISxxxx UNITS WITH CUSHION USE RIDxxxx DIMENSION L

B

SHOCK ABSORBER SPECIFICATIONS

UNITSIZE

RISxx25RIDxx25RISxx32RIDxx32RISxx50RIDxx50

THREADTYPE

SHOCKABSORBER

WEIGHTlb kg in-lb Nm

KINETICENERGY

LOADSTROKEin mm in mm in mmmm

M14 x 1.5M14 x 1.5M20 x 1.5M20 x 1.5M25 x 1.5M25 x 1.5

.42

.42.625.625.91.91

10.710.715.915.923.123.1

.12

.12

.28

.28

.76

.76

.05

.05

.13

.13

.34

.34

150150225360600

1400

1717254068

158

4.004.004.674.675.515.51

SHOCKABSORBER

LENGTH

ACROSSSHOCKFLATS

101.6101.6118.6118.6140.0140.0

.39

.39

.69

.69

.88

.88

1010

17.517.522.222.2

691466915369147691547542369156

SHOCKABSORBER

KIT NO.

SHOCK ABSORBERS KITS INCLUDE:FOR RISxx UNITS - 1 SHOCK AND 1 NUTFOR RIDxx UNITS - 1 SHOCK, 1 NUT, 1 THREAD SEAL,

AND 1 SEAL WASHER1 KIT REQUIRED PER END OF ADJUSTMENT DESIRED

505060607070

SHOCKABSORBEREFFECTIVE

ANGLE

TO ORDER SPECIFY:Product, Series, Type, Design No.,Bore Size, Rotation, and Options.

NOTES:1) Either optional angle adjustments or shock absorbers must be

ordered on all units. (Either option is mandatory.)2) Switches and switch bracket kits must be ordered separately.

H -NBDIR3

THREE POSITIONUNITS

Only 90°Mid-position on

Double Rack Unitsare available.

PRODUCTR - Rotary

SERIESI - Internal Passage

TYPE

DESIGN NO.Imperial Metric

For RISx50 2 6For All Others 1 5

25 PB AB M- -

SSINGLERACK

DDOUBLE

RACK

BORE Ø25 mm32 mm50 mm25 mm32 mm50 mm

TORQUEAT 87 psi

32 in-lb [3.6 Nm]63 in-lb [7.1 Nm]

207 in-lb [23.4 Nm]64 in-lb [7.2 Nm ]

127 in-lb [14.3 Nm]414 in-lb [46.8 Nm]

SHOCK ABSORBERSNB - Shock installed both directionsNC - Shock installed counterclockwiseNW - Shock installed clockwise

See note 1

ROTATION SPEED CONTROL VALVEPB - Rotational Speed Controls

both directionsPC - Rotational Speed Controls

counterclockwisePW - Rotational Speed Controls

clockwise

ANGLE ADJUSTMENTAB - Angle adjustment with shock

pad installed both endsAC - Angle adjustment with shock

pad installed counterclockwise 90°AW - Angle adjustment with shock

pad installed clockwise 90°See note 1

OPTIONSM - Reed Magnet,

Solid State

BORE Ø25 mm32 mm50 mm

180 90x x

ROTATION180°

MID-POSITION90°

On 3-position onlyMust be specified

-

UNITSIZE

SHOCKABSORBER

KIT NO.RISxx25RIDxx25RISxx32RIDxx32RISxx50RIDxx50

691466915369147691547542369156

NOTE: One port control fitting per kit

70695-0170696-0170695-0370696-0370695-0370696-0370695-0370696-03

RIxx125RIxx525RIxx132RIxx532RIDx150RIDx550RISx250RISx650

ROTATION SPEED CONTROLKIT NO.

1

HOLLOW PINIONH - Hollow Pinion

Leave blankif standard

RIx125RIx525RIx132RIx532RID150RID550RIS250RIS650

UNITSIZE

7197271997719737199871975720007197572000

PORTING PLATEKIT NUMBER

UNITSIZE

Kits include:1 Porting Plate,2 Locating Rings,4 Fasteners, Required O-Rings

Rotary Actuator Shock Absorber Upgrade

Effective September 1, 2004 PHD will implement changes on certain sizes of Series RA and RI Rotary Actuators toupgrade shock absorbers. This change will provide improved stopping capacity and actuator performance. Additionally,the new self-compensating, non-adjustable shock will eliminate the current adjustable type that was tedious to adjust incertain applications.

The specific models affected are:RASx25RISx25RIDx25RIDx32RISx50

Below is the upgraded shock absorber specifications and dimensionschart found on page 5-51 of Catalog 2005. This chart supersedes thechart in Catalog 2005. Highlighted (shaded) areas show changes fromthe old specifications chart in Catalog 2003.

In addition, a design numberchange was required only onthe RISx50. This is due to thenew shock having a largerdiameter. Below is the designnumber change in theordering data found on page5-42 of Catalog 2005.

NOTE: PHD’s CAD andSizing software will be revisedby September 1, 2004 toreflect these changes.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 11-18-04 PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES RA

Make this correction in your current catalog and inform all customers using Series RA Rotary Actuators with shock absorbers.


Effective immediately, PHD will implement changes on certain sizes of Series RA Rotary Actuators to upgrade shockabsorbers. This change will provide improved stopping capacity and actuator performance. It will affect shock absorberlength on bore size 20 & 25 units, the hex dimensions, and the Kinetic Energy Load on page 5-38 of CAT-05.

Below is the revised shock absorber specifications chart and dimensions which replace the data on page 5-38 ofCatalog 2005. Shaded areas show changes from the old specifications.

SHOCK ABSORBER DIMENSION/LOAD CHANGES

B HEX

A MAX

F FLAT

SHOCK ABSORBER SPECIFICATIONS

BORESIZE2025324050

PHDSHOCK

ABSORBERNUMBER56722-0156722-0256722-0356722-04*56722-05*

THREADTYPE

M12 x 1M14 x 1.5M20 x 1.5M25 x 1.5M25 x 1.5

SHOCKABSORBER

WEIGHTlb.11.13.34.67.67

kg.05.06.15.3.3

in-lb3.39.321.345.087.9

Nm.361.051.715.19.94

KINETICENERGY

LOADSTROKEin.39.42.25.5.5

mm10.010.76.3512.712.7

in2.252.372.413.383.44

mm57.260.261.285.787.4

AMAX.

in——.31——

mm——8.0——

B HEX

*These shock absorbers have an adjustment feature. (See PHD Product Sizing Catalog for details).

in.31.39—.91.91

mm8

10—2323

FFLATS





21

87

6 5

43

21

87

6 5

43

NOTES:1) PORT POSITIONS INDICATED BY CIRCLED NUMBERS.2) PINION AND HUB SHOWN AT MID ROTATION.3) FOR DIMENSIONS NOT GIVEN SEE RIS SINGLE RACK

DIMENSIONS PAGE 3D-4.4) MID POSITION HOLDING TORQUE ON RID UNITS IS

1/2 CATALOGED OUTPUT TORQUE.


3RID1253RID5253RID1323RID5323RID1503RID550

UNITSIZE

LETTER DIMENSION

.709[18.0]1.496[38.0]1.890[48.0]

Z.197[5.0].315[8.0].315[8.0]

GG.295[7.5].472

[12.0]1.535[39.0]

PP.472

[12.0].630

[16.0].630

[16.0]

C

DOUBLE RACK DIMENSIONS

SINGLE RACKSERIES RISx25, RISx32 & RISx50


3RIS1253RIS5253RIS1323RIS5323RIS1503RIS550

UNITSIZE

LETTER DIMENSION

.731[18.6].888

[22.6]1.270[32.2]

V.640

[16.3].689

[17.5].689

[17.5]

GG.295[7.5].472

[12.0].787

[20.0]

PP1.250[32.5]1.378[35.0]1.378[35.0]

C

SINGLE RACK DIMENSIONS

M14 x 1.5

M20 x 1.5

M20 x 1.5

Y.295[7.5].472

[12.0].787

[20.0]

Z

DOUBLE RACKSERIES RIDx25, RIDx32 & RIDx50


3RIS125 & 3RID1253RIS525 & 3RID5253RIS132 & 3RID1323RIS532 & 3RID5323RIS150 & 3RID1503RIS550 & 3RID550

UNITSIZE

COMMON LETTER DIMENSION (SINGLE AND DOUBLE)

.618[15.7].854

[21.7]1.142[29.0]

AA10-32

M5 x 0.81/8-27 NPT

1/8-28 BSPP1/8-27 NPT

1/8-28 BSPP

JJ.807

[20.5]1.161[29.5]1.870[47.5]

ZZ.354[9.0].492

[12.5].591

[15.0]

LL.354[9.0].571

[14.5].701

[17.8]

MM.618

[15.7].854

[21.7]1.142[29.0]

NN1.496[38.0]1.965[49.9]2.362[60.0]

KK

A B C

C B

A(0-90-180°)

P R P R P R

2X JJ PORT(3 POSITION CONTROL)

2X JJ PORT(UNIT CONTROL)

NN

Z

PPZZ

KKC

AA

MM

LL

GGSEE PAGE 3D-6 FORPRESSURE INPUTPORT INTERFACEDIMENSIONS

SEE PAGE 3D-6 FORPRESSURE OUTPUTHUB INTERFACEDIMENSIONS


2X JJ PORT(3 POSITIONCONTROL)


Z

AA NN

2X ZZ PP

KKC2X MM

LLGG

SEE PAGE 3D-6 FORPRESSURE INPUTPORT INTERFACEDIMENSIONS

SEE PAGE 3D-6 FORPRESSURE OUTPUTHUB INTERFACEDIMENSIONS

V

Y THREAD

2

1

4

3 5 6

2

1

4

3 5 6


Unknown





.236[6.0].236[6.0].349[8.9]

A2.953[75.0]3.937

[100.0]4.528

[115.0]

C TOL.1.378[35.0]1.811[46.0]2.283[58.0]

ERIx125RIx525RIx132RIx532RIx150RIx550

UNIT.472

[12.0].472

[12.0].709

[18.0]

Ø CLETTER DIMENSION

B.236[6.0].315[8.0].472

[12.0]

Ø F

METRIC INFORMATION SHOWN IN [ ].NOTE: LOCATING RINGS ARE TO BE PRESSED INTO BODY AND PINION

+.0002/-.0005+[.005]/-[.013]+.0002/-.0005+[.005]/-[.013]-.0002/-.0006-[.005]/-[.015]

D.118[3.0].079[2.0].276[7.0]

+.0001/-.0007+[.003]/-[.018]+.0001/-.0007+[.003]/-[.018]+.0002/-.0005+[.005]/-[.013]

F TOL.

BODY LOCATING RING KIT

2X B

PINION LOCATING RING KIT

21

38

6

7

5

4

EA

D

4X C

2X F

A

BODY LOCATING RING KIT

56

471

82

3

2X G PINIONLOCATING RING I.D.

4X H BODYLOCATING RING I.D.

.197[5.0].236[6.0].315[8.0]

Ø G.354[9.0].354[9.0].591

[15.0]

Ø H

M.630

[16.0].787

[20.0].984

[25.0]

UNITSIZE

RIx125RIx525RIx132RIx532RIx150RIx550

NUT LOCATION

SLOT DIMENSIONSTYPICAL BOTH SIDES

(POSITION 1 & 3)

M

2X A

4X C

2X B

2X D



FILE UNDER MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER

REQUIRED ACTION:

TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: M1

DATE: 4-3-91 PRODUCT TYPE: MULTI-MOTIONPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL

All Multi-Motion Actuators have an improved spline base seal. The original O-Ring and backup havebeen replaced with a Glyd ring seal and back-up. See illustration.

This new seal has increased life and is a definite improvement especially in hydraulic application.This change was effective February, 1991. All future seal kits will also include this improved seal.

Note: This change is currently effective only on standard Buna-N seals. Units with Viton or otherseal compounds will still receive the old style O-Ring and back-up until later notification.

All customers using a Multi-Motion Actuator should be made aware of this change.

SPLINE BASE SEALBACKUP

OLD STYLE

NEW STYLE

HIGH PRESSURE SIDE



REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 4-4-91 PRODUCT TYPE: MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES 8000 TANDEM

Make sure on any future orders for 8000 Series Air/Oil Tandem Multi-Motion Actuators with cushions,that the customer is aware of the 20° cushion.

The standard cushion angle for PHD Air/Oil Tandem Multi-Motion Actuators with the -D1 or -D2option has historically been cataloged as 30°. Through recent testing it was discovered that theactual cushioning capability of an 8000 Series Air/Oil Tandems could have been as little asapproximately 10°. Changes were instituted in November of 1990 in the cushion stud design forthese actuators. The effective cushioned travel is now 20° minimum and will be cataloged as such inthe future.



REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 1-15-92 PRODUCT TYPE: MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: MA1 MINIATURE MULTI-MO-

TIONS

Convert requests for Miniature Multi-Motions for hydraulic service to Series 1000 units.


Hydraulic Miniature Multi-Motions EliminatedPHD is no longer recommending our miniature Multi-Motion Actuators (MA1) for hydraulic service.These are currently rated at 500 psi for hydraulic service in Catalog 91. We have found the standardseals are not suitable for proper sealing of hydraulic fluids. The volume of units sold for hydraulicservice is very low. We recommend that customers requiring hydraulic Miniature Multi-MotionActuators move up to a Series 1000 to ensure proper performance and satisfaction.

This change will be reflected in future catalogs.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 3-1-94 PRODUCT TYPE: MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 1-8000 SERIES

Inform any customers who may have experienced -PK option rod end failures of this productimprovement.


Improved Preloaded Keyway (PK) Shaft OptionA change has been made to the preloaded keyway rod end option for all 1-8000 Series Multi-MotionActuators. A .030" radius has been added to the notch which is used for the preload set screw.

This improvement is a result of feedback from some PHD customers who experienced prematurefailure of rod ends with the -PK option. This radius adds strength to the shaft and brings the durabilityof the -PK option up to normal PHD specifications.

These improved preloaded keyways will be phased in as inventory permits. All units with -PK optionshipped after March 1, 1994 should include this improved design.

.030" RADIUS

FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER

TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL1

DATE: 4-10-91 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: SA012, SA022, SA032, SA042, SA062

Several dimensional changes have occurred between the model SS and new model SA Series “S” slides. Thesechanges were made to provide value added benefits based on customer requests.

Dimensional Changes:1) The four thru holes in the bearing housing remain unchanged (04 Model only). 06 Model was 1.625, is now1.688. Tapped holes were added on the opposite side of these thru holes for auxiliary mounting.2) Overall height and width dimensions remain unchanged, however several length dimensions have increased.

A) The tool plate thickness has increased.B) The bearing housing length has increased.C) The guide shaft length has increased.

3) Threads in the SA042 tool plate are now coarse 10-24 in place of fine 10-32.4) The 12 blind threaded holes that were in some model SS slides have been removed (Note these threaded holes

were not advertised).5) The port side surface is no longer a completely flat surface. This was changed to accommodate the proximity

switch option.

Value added changes:1) Proximity switch option for sensing extent and retract have been added. The proximity switches sense the steel

shaft collars and a steel target pin in the tool plate.2) Shaft collar kits for stroke adjustment and extend shock pads have been added. Retract shock pads are now

located externally on the guide rods. This increases the shock pad area. The SA042 and SA062 modelscontinue to use an internal shock pad for extend. The new models SA012, SA022, and SA032 have no internalshock pad for the extend stroke. (See Catalog 91) A stop collar kit must be used to have shock pads on extendfor those slides. Stop collars are highly recommended for most applications.

3) Dowel pin holes are now optional in the bearing housing and in the tool plate for precise locating of the slide andtooling.

4) The tool plate is now thicker to allow a deeper guide shaft press fit. This will allow the slide to withstand greaterimpact loads and removes some fatigue loading on the screws. The model SA slides now have socket head capscrews in place of flat head cap screws. This will allow easier repair and reassembly. The nut and washercombination for fastening the piston rod to the tool plate has been eliminated. The tool plate is now machinedwith a precise bore that the piston rod is pressed into.

5) The cylinder bore is now machined completely through the bearing housing. This allows PHD to offer longerstroke lengths. Removing the cap allows access to a hex in the end of the piston rod for easy assembly andrepair.

6) Stop collar kits allow the slide stroke to be adjusted to customer requirements.

REQUIRED ACTION:Please make your customers aware that several dimensions have changed from model SS to new model SA design.The model SS is not completely interchangeable with the new design model SA. Whenever possible, we recommendselling the new model SA slide.


DIMENSIONS: S SERIES SLIDES


SL1 PAGE 2 OF 2



DATE: 4-10-91 PRODUCT TYPE: METRIC SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: SA017, SA027, SA037, SA047, SA067

Several dimensional changes have occurred between model SS and new model SA Series “S” slides. These changeswere made to provide value added benefits based on customer requests.

Dimensional Changes:1) The four thru holes in the bearing housing have been changed. The thru holes on the SA047 model have

changed from a 31,5 square pattern to a 32,0 pattern. The SA067 pattern was changed from a 41,5 to 42,0.Tapped holes were added on the opposite side of these thru holes for auxiliary mounting.

2) Overall height and width dimensions remain unchanged on the SA047 model. On the SA067 model the heightchanged from 51,0 to 50,0 and the width changed from 101,5 to 102,0. The following length dimensions haveincreased:

A) The tool plate thickness has increased.B) The bearing housing length has increased.C) The guide shaft length has increased.

3) The 12 blind threaded holes that were in some model SS series have been removed (Note these threaded holeswere not advertised).

4) The port side surface is no longer a completely flat surface. This was changed to accommodate the proximityswitch option.

5) Guide shaft have been changed to hard metric diameters.

Value added changes:1) Proximity switch option for sensing extent and retract have been added. The proximity switches sense the steel

shaft collars and a steel target pin in the tool plate.2) Shaft collar kits for stroke adjustment and extend shock pads have been added. Retract shock pads are now

located externally on the guide rods. This increases the shock pad area. The SA047 and SA067 modelscontinue to use an internal shock pad for extend. Models SA017, SA027, and SA037 have no internal shock padfor the extend stroke. A stop collar kit must be used to have shock pads on extend for those slides. Stop collarsare highly recommended for most applications.

3) Dowel pin holes have been added in the bearing housing and in the tool plate.4) The tool plate is now thicker to allow a deeper guide shaft press fit. This will allow the slide to withstand greater

impact loads and removes some fatigue loading on the screws. Model SA slides now have socket head capscrews in place of flat head cap screws. This will allow easier repair and assembly. The nut and washercombination for fastening the piston rod to the tool plate has been eliminated. The tool plate is now machinedwith a precise bore that the piston rod is pressed into.

5) The cylinder bore is now machined completely through the bearing housing. This allows PHD to offer longerstroke lengths. Removing the cap allows access to a hex in the end of the piston rod for easy assembly andrepair.

6) Stop collar kits allow the slide stroke to be adjusted to customer requirements.7) Corrosion resistant coating on guide shafts is standard for corrosion resistance.

Please make your customers aware that several dimensions have changed from model SS to new model SA design.The model SS is not completely interchangeable with the new design model SA. Whenever possible we recommendselling the new model SA slide.

REQUIRED ACTION:




SL2 PAGE 1 OF 2


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 4-11-91 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: RS033, RS042, RS062,

RS082, RS012, RS122

If a tool plate or threaded rod needs to be replaced on a design 02 or 03 slide and was manufacturedbefore 11-02-90, both a threaded rod and tool plate need to be ordered. If the threaded rod has aturned down diameter on one end, the slide was manufactured before 11-02-90.

The following changes were made to reduce manufacturing costs:

1) A step or turned down diameter on the end of the threaded travel adjustment rod wasremoved.

2) The counterbore on the back of the tool plate was enlarged to accept the full diameter of thethreaded rod.

These changes do not affect any dimensions of the slide.

TOOLPLATE

END OF ROD IS NO LONGER STEPPED OR TURNED DOWNCOUNTERBORE



REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 4-11-91 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES B, C, E, U, AND R

Felt lubrication wicks have been added between ball bushings to reduce lubrication maintenance.These wicks will constantly provide a source of lubricant to the guide shafts and bearings. The wickswill be saturated with oil, and should not require any additional lubricant for the life of the bearing.Long stroke units have been susceptible to having dry shafts, thus increasing friction. This valueadded feature will be gradually phased into production around 04-01-91. Bearing replacement kitswill include bearings and felt wicks. There is no additional charge for this enhancement.

Please make your customer aware that the felt wicks included in the bearing replacement kits will notbe used when repairing bearing in a slide manufactured before 04-01-91. If your customerexpresses a concern of not using the wicks, an older bearing housing may be modified toaccommodate the oil wicks. Please consult PHD.


SERIES B, C, E, AND U

SERIES RSPACER TUBEWICK

WICK RETAINER

aaaaaaaaSEAL BEARING

SHAFT

HOUSING

WICKaaaaaaaaSHAFT


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 4-11-91 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES M

Please make your customers aware that all seals included in a seal repair kit may not be used. If thepiston has a single piston seal groove, use the quad seal. If the piston has two seal grooves, use theblock-vee seals. New piston and rod assemblies may be used in slide housings that previouslycontained single quad seals.

Single quad seal on air pistons have been changed to dual block-vee seals in order to lower thebreak away friction on models MS03, MS04, and MS06 Slides. The MS02 remains unchanged andcontinues to use quad seals. The seal on the oil side of tandem units will continue to be a quad seal.Seal kits after 05-18-90 will contain both quad seals and block-vee seals.



REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 4-24-91 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 7 MODEL OR SERIES: S, T, R

The addition of options for dowel pins have been added to Series R, T, and S Slides. J1 and J2 arethe options for the tool plate dowel pin holes. J1 designates close fit dowel pin holes, and J2 desig-nates normal fit dowel pin holes. R1 and R2 are the options for the housings or end blocks. R1designates close fit dowel pin holes and R2 designates normal fit dowel pin holes. (The front blockof Series R will have dowel pin holes and the rear block will have dowel slots.)

This will satisfy customers' varying dowel pin hole requirements or needs.

Catalog 91 has incorporated these options in the Ordering Data and Dimensional drawings.


Inform customers who use Slides, that dowel pin holes are now available.



SL6 PAGE 2 OF 7

DIMENSIONS: T SERIES SLIDES


SL6 PAGE 3 OF 7

DIMENSIONS: Rx03


SL6 PAGE 4 OF 7

DIMENSIONS: Rx04 & Rx06


SL6 PAGE 5 OF 7

DIMENSIONS: Rx08 & Rx10


SL6 PAGE 6 OF 7

DIMENSIONS: Rx12


SL6 PAGE 7 OF 7


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 4-24-91 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: TS08

TS081 Slides have 7/16 threaded and thru holes. These mounting holes have been changed to 3/8threaded and thru holes to keep the mounting holes on a 1/8" increment which is standard in somecompanies. This requires a design change, raising the design number to 2 (TS082). This will beshown in all future literature. Old design slides can still be ordered.

Catalog 91 reflects this change.

All TS081 Slide orders should be checked to see if they can be changed to TS082.


DIMENSIONS: MODEL TS08



REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 4-24-91 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: S, T, R, M, U, B

Corrosion resistant plated shaft option -Q is now available on all Slides listed above. This platinggives the outside diameters of the shafts a rust and corrosion resistant coating to prevent damage tothe bearings. With this option the ends and any undercuts will be uncoated. Entirely plated shaftsare available-consult factory.

Options are shown in Catalog 91.

ENDS UNPLATED ENDS AND UNDERCUTS UNPLATED


Inform all Slide customers of this new problem solving option.



DATE: 7-15-91 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: -Q SHAFTING OPTION


Option -Q is a corrosion resistant electrocoating for slide shafting. The graph shows data on -Q andother shaft materials from actual PHD salt spray tests. Physical properties of -Q are listed below.

Material: ChromiumThickness: .0001/.0002 inchHardness: 70 RC Plus

Friction: Self LubricatingHeat: -400°F to 1600°F (Applies to -Q Shafting Only)

Corrosion Resistance: See Chart (Do not use near Sulfuric or Hydrochloric acid)Aesthetics: Satiny, Silver, Matte Finish

Safety: FDA and USDA approved (Applies to -Q Shafting Only)

REQUIRED ACTION:It is obvious from the above chart that the -Q option on shafts is the best method of corrosionresistance. Customers with a history of rust problems, or who have applications where rust maybecome a problem should be made aware of this new option. Recommend -Q option.

NOTE: Standard -Q option does not cover cut off ends or undercuts for snap rings. If the entireshaft needs to be plated, contact PHD.

HOURS IN SALT SPRAY

RUST

COV

ERAG

E

24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192

SPOTS

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

OILED -Q SHAFTING0

DRY

ALLO

Y SH

AFTI

NG

OILE

D AL

LOY

SHAF

TING

DRY -Q SHAFTING

DRY 416 STAINLESS

OILED 416 STAINLESS


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 10-1-91 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL PHD SLIDES

Let any customers who have experienced loose shaft fasteners know about this productimprovement. This eliminates the problem on their future slides.


Loctite On Slide Shaft Fasteners

REMOVABLE LOCTITE

Starting on approximately August 1, 1991, all fasteners that attach tool plates or end blocks to slideshafts, and all fasteners that thread into the saddle or housing are assembled with removable Loctite.This change has come at the request of a few of our customers who have experienced these shaftfasteners loosening during high speed slide operation. The Loctite is a removable type of adhesivethat prevents the screws from loosening due to vibration, but allows them to be taken out formaintenance of the Slide. There will be no additional charge for this product improvement.


DATE: 10-1-91 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES S SLIDES


REQUIRED ACTION:Inform your customers of this new Slide Model and make sure Model SB is specified when usingTransition Plates with Series S Slides.

Consult PHD for Transition Plate availability.


The very popular Model SA Slide has been expanded to include a Model SB that has drilled andC'bored holes in the tool plate. These holes allow the tool plate to be used with Transition Plates formounting other PHD products on the Model SB Slide. These transition plates are not shown inCatalog 91 but are being designed on an “as needed” basis.

The tool plate on the Model SB Slide makes some customer tooling easier to attach.

Page 2 of this Technical Data Bulletin provides you with dimensional information on the Model SBSlide tool plate. This new model will be available as of 10-1-91.

Model Number example: SB 042 X 1-Q

New Tool Plate Model Available


DATE: 10-1-91 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 2 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES S SLIDES

FILE UNDER SLIDES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDERPHD, Inc. • 10216 Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN 46899 U.S.A. • Phone (219) 747-6151 • Fax (219) 747-6754


REQUIRED ACTION:



Inform your Series M Slides customers of this product improvement and use this information toexpand your sales of Series M Slides.


New Bearings and Shafts for Series M SlidesStarting February 1, 1992, the Series M Slides will have improved bearings and shafts. Thebushings that were Duralon will now be a fluoropolymer composite (“TC”). This is the same materialused in the popular Series S Slides.

The shafts will be standard with PHD's corrosion-resistant plating which also increases their wearresistance. This new bushing and shaft combination will greatly increase the life and the reliability ofthe Series M Slides. The Slide's design number will change from Design 1 to Design 2. PHD willautomatically convert all incoming orders to the new Design 2 bushings and shafts unless specificallynoted otherwise. Repair kits will contain bearings with the new material. The Slide dimensions andpricing will remain unchanged.

New Standard Corrosion-Resistant Shafts

New Improved Bearings Use Fluoropolymer Composite Material


REQUIRED ACTION:



Make sure all of your past, present, and future Slide customers are aware of this additionalcapability.


Compact Switch Now Available on Series M SlideStarting February 15, a new switch bracket kit for the Series M Slide will be available to allow Series1750 Compact Reed and Hall Switches to be used on this Slide Series.

The new bracket kit number is 13591. The list price for this kit is $4.75. Using this new bracket kitalong with the Compact Switches reduces size and price of the Slide package. The Slides must stillbe ordered with the proper magnetic option for the Switches to function.

Bracket Kit Number 13591

1750 Compact Proximity Switches





DIMENSIONS

Compact Switch Now Available on Series M Slide


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 7-6-92 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 4 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES C SLIDES

This information may be used to analyze future applications and to assure customers of the “C”Slide's capabilities.


Series C Slide Speed ChartsQuestions have come up regarding maximum speeds for Series C Magnetically Coupled CylinderSlides. The following three pages contain speed charts (load vs. travel) for all Series C Slides. Thecharts are based on actual test data using Slides with shock absorbers.

Note: None of these tests caused the magnetic piston to uncouple from the slide's saddle.





Series CxU031 Slide Speed Charts

Time values shown wereimposed by proper combinationof flow controls and shockabsorbers. Faster travels may beachieved, but not withoutpotential damage to slide units.

Performance Data for CxU031 x 16 (Horizontal)50 & 90 PSI

Tim

e (S

econ

ds)

50 psi @ 1 lb. Load50 psi @ 14 lb. Load90 psi @ 1 lb. Load90 psi @ 14 lb. Load

201510500.0

0.5

1.0

1.5

201510500.0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

Performance Data for CxU031 x 16 (Vertical)50 & 90 PSI / Up Stroke

Stroke (Inches)

Tim

e (S

econ

ds)

50 psi @ 1.5 lb. Load90 psi @ 1.5 lb. Load90 psi @ 4.5 lb. Load

201 5500.0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

Performance Data CxU031 x 16 (Vertical)50 & 90 PSI / Down Stroke

Tim

e (S

econ

ds)

50 psi @ 1.5 lb. Load90 psi @ 1.5 lb. Load90 psi @ 4.5 lb. Load

1 0Stroke (Inches)

Stroke (Inches)







25201510500.0

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

Performance Data for CxU041 (Vertical)50 & 90 PSI / Up Stroke

Tim

e (S

econ

ds)

30 3025201510500.0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

Performance Data for CxU041 x 24 (Vertical)50 & 90 PSI / Down Stroke

Tim

e (S

econ

ds)

25201510500.0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

Performance Data for CxU041 x 24 (Horizontal)50 & 90 PSI

Tim

e (S

econ

ds)

Stroke (Inches)50 psi @ 1.5 lb. Load50 psi @ 11.5 lb. Load90 psi @ 1.5 lb. Load90 psi @ 22.5 lb. Load

Stroke (Inches)50 psi @ 1.5 lb. Load50 psi @ 11.5 lb. Load90 psi @ 1.5 lb. Load90 psi @ 22.5 lb. Load

Stroke (Inches)

50 psi @ 35 lb. Load50 psi @ 1 lb. Load

90 psi @ 1 lb. Load90 psi @ 35 lb. Load








40353025201510500.0

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

Performance Data for Cx061 x 36 (Horizontal)50 & 60 PSI

Tim

e (S

econ

ds)


40353025201510500.0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1.0

Performance Data for CxU061 x 36 (Vertical)50 & 90 PSI / Down Stroke

Tim

e (S

econ

ds)


4030201000

1

2

Performance Data for CxU061 x 36 (Vertical)50 & 90 PSI / Up Stroke

Tim

e (S

econ

ds)

Stroke (Inches) Stroke (Inches)

Stroke (Inches)


REQUIRED ACTION:



Inform your Series C Slide customers of the recommendation for lubricated air.


Recommendation of Lubricated Air on Series C SlidesPHD is now recommending the use of lubricated air on Series C Magnetically Coupled CylinderSlides. Applications which require reduced speeds and smooth motion will particularly benefit fromthe use of lubricated air. The internal seals are compatible with standard petroleum-based oiltypically used for air cylinder lubrication.

This lubricated air is not required, but will greatly enhance the Series C Slide's performance.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 7-6-92 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SS AND SA SLIDES

Inform any customers who may have encountered problems with shock pads about this productimprovement.


Improved Shock Pad Adhesive On Series S SlidesIn some high load applications, customers experienced the shock pad coming off the piston onSeries S Slides. PHD has changed the type of adhesive used to secure this shock pad, which hascured this problem. Units shipped after 3-15-92 were assembled with this improved adhesive.

NEW ADHESIVE USED ON SHOCK PAD


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 1-15-93 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES B

Inform your customers who use dowel pin holes on Series B Slides of this applicationrecommendation.


Proper Dowel Pin Hole Usage

FOR DOWEL PINBOTH ENDS

± .002

DIAMETER FOR DOWEL PIN FROM OPPOSITE SIDECLEARANCE DIA FROM THIS SIDE2 PLACES EACH END

Dowel pin holes in the end blocks of Series B Slides are intended for use with the dowel slot on theopposite end block. Tolerances between the two end blocks do not allow the dowel pin holes to beused for precise location. The use of dowel pin holes on one end and the dowel pin slot on theopposite end do provide a means for locating.

The tolerance between the centerline of the dowel hole and the centerline of the dowel slot is ± .002.



DATE: 3-1-94 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL SA & SB SLIDES


SA & SB Slides Modified for PHD SwitchAs of March 1, 1994, Model SA & SB Slides are available with PHD Series 5580 Hall Effect Switches(See Catalog SW02). This change affects the tool plate and all Proximity Switch Kits.

The switch target cavity in the tool plate is enlarged to accommodate a new universal switch target.The switch ready kit has a new part number and can be used for either the traditional 6 mm squareProximity Switches or PHD’s Series 5580 Hall Effect Switches.

As of March 1, 1994, all Proximity Switch Kit numbers shown in PHD Catalog 93 will be converted tothe new kit numbers by PHD.

SLIDE OLD NEWMODEL KIT NUMBER KIT NUMBERSx012 19461 55967Sx022 19462 55969Sx032 19463 55971Sx042 19464 55973Sx062 19465 55975

Each proximity switch ready kit contains the following items:1 Target Pin with Magnet2 Steel Shaft Collars with Screws (one modified with magnetic target)2 Shock Pads2 Switch Mounting Brackets2 4-40 x .500 Socket Head Cap Screws

Proximity Switches are ordered separately.



DATE: 3-1-94 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 2 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL SA & SB SLIDES


SA & SB Slides Modified for PHD SwitchThe changes to the SA & SB Slides and the addition of the PHD Series 5580 Hall Effect Switchprovide a very cost effective alternative to traditional 6 mm square Proximity Switches. The newUniversal Switch Ready Kit is simple and can be used with the PHD 5580 Switches or 6 mm squareProximity Switches.

REQUIRED ACTION:Inform all of your SA & SB Slide users of this change and the cost effective switches available onfuture orders. (Units shipped prior to March 1, 1994 will not accept the new kits without modifyingthe target cavity in the tool plate.)

PROXIMITY SWITCH KITPress target pin with magnet side up for Series 5580 Hall Switches and magnet side down for Model18431 Proximity Switches. Press in target pin until it bottoms out in the hole.

6 mm PHD 5580 HALL EFFECT SWITCHOR SQUARE PROXIMITY SWITCH(NOT INCLUDED IN KIT,MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY)

SHAFT COLLAR WITH MAGNETFOR SERIES 5580 SWITCH SENSING

SHAFT COLLAR

SHOCK PAD

SOCKET HEADCAP SCREW

SWITCH MOUNTING BRACKET

TARGET PIN

SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW

LARGER DIAMETER TARGET CAVITY (MARCH 1, 1994)



DATE: 7-11-94 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: SA042, SA047, SB042, SB047


Piston Seal Improved on Size 04 SA and SB SlidesStarting July 8, 1994 all size 04 SA and SB Slides will be shipped with an improved piston sealdesign. This new design incorporates two block vee seals instead of the single "PZ" type seal. Incertain applications the "PZ" type piston seal had unacceptable amounts of blow-by and inconsistentperformance.

All orders received for these units will automatically be upgraded to the new design. The new modelnumbers are shown below:

Old Model Number New Model NumberSA042 SA043 (English)SB042 SB043 (English)SA047 SA048 (Metric)SB047 SB048 (Metric)

UPGRADE KITSUpgrade kits are available and are ONLY recommended for those few applications where thecustomer is experiencing piston seal blow-by. The vast majority of units in the field DO NOT havethis symptom and require no upgrade kits. Upgrade kits are available on a no charge basis for unitsunder warranty.

See page two of this bulletin for kit number information.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 7-11-94 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 2 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: SA042, SA047, SB042, SB047

None required unless your customer is experiencing blow-by on 04 size SA and SB Slides. Retrofitthose units with the upgrade kits or return to PHD for upgrading.


Piston Seal Improved on Size 04 SA and SB Slides

UPGRADE KIT NUMBERSEnglish Metric

57380-008-* 1" STROKE 57379-0025-* 25mm STROKE57380-016-* 2" STROKE 57379-0050-* 50mm STROKE57380-024-* 3" STROKE 57379-0075-* 75mm STROKE

* –1 Buna N–2 Viton

Upgrade kits contain a piston and rod assembly and all seals required to update and rebuild theslide.

A full description of the unit must be included with any order for upgrade kits. This will allow PHD tosupply new labels that will contain the new model number.



DATE: 10-31-94 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES T, R, S; MODEL SD/SE


Stop Collar Tightening TorquesStop collars mounted on the shafts of PHD Slides provide an easy means of adjusting the slide'stravel. The socket head cap screw used to secure the collar in place can be "over torqued" causingthe stop collar to crack or split. Listed below are recommended torques for stop collar screws forvarious PHD Slides.

SOCKET HEADCAP SCREWS

This information will be included in future catalogs and product packers.

Stop Collar Tightening Torques

REQUIRED ACTION:Inform any customers who may have encountered cracked stop collars of these torque specifications.

03647.2505.7313.5505.7

SLIDETYPE

SA/SB

TSxx1(ENGLISH)

TSxx5(METRIC)

RSxx1

IN-LBSNm

IN-LBSNm

IN-LBSNm

IN-LBSNm

SLIDE SIZE01151.7––––––

SLIDETYPE

SD/SESTD. SHAFT

IN-LBSNm

IN-LBSNm

SLIDE SIZE12303.4 505.7

13505.7768.6

14768.617019.2

STOP COLLAR TIGHTENING TORQUES

STOP COLLAR TIGHTENING TORQUES

SD/SEOVERSIZE

SHAFT

1512013.617019.2

1617019.217019.2

02151.7––––––

04505.7505.7637.1505.7

06150171501710612505.7

08––

10511.9

––

15017

10––––––

15017

12––––––

15017


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 10-31-94 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES C

Inform your Series C Slide customers that it is important to maintain a film of PHD Pneu LubeGrease on the cylinder tube.


Recommendation of PHD Pneu Lube on Series C Slide Cylinder TubesPHD recommends the use of PHD Pneu Lube 17444 on the outside of the cylinder tube on Series CMagnetically Coupled Cylinder Slides.

It is important to maintain a grease film of PHD Pneu Lube 17444 on the cylinder tube to provideadequate radial bearing lubrication for the saddle magnetic cartridge.

PHD Pneu Lube 17444 is available as a 14.5 oz. cartridge from PHD.

Use PHD Pneu Lube on cylinder O.D.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 1-1-95 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SD, SE, SK, SL, T, R, & B

Use the -H4 option for ordering slide cylinder assemblies.


Easy Replacement Cylinder Call-outOrdering replacement cylinders for many of PHD's Powered Slides is now easy through the use of asimple option code -H4. Here is how it works:

1. Call out the complete slide model number followed by -H4.2. PHD will supply the complete cylinder with all required options and any features related to

the slide unit.

This option reduces potential errors when specifying replacement cylinders and ensures that thecustomer receives the correct replacement unit.

This option applies to Series B, R, T, SD, SE, SK, and SL Slides. Future parts sheets will bechanged to reflect this replacement cylinder call-out.

-H4 OPTION


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 7-4-95 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 5 MODEL OR SERIES: SD/SE

Inform your Series SD/SE customers of this product improvement.

1. Latest ball bushing provides increased performance.2. Retaining ring design provides easy field replacement.3. Dimensional changes.


New Ball Bushings and Retaining Design on SD/SE Slides

Beginning approximately 7-3-95, PHD will begin a 2-3 month phase-in period of converting new orders for the model SD/SE slide from Design 1 to Design 2. Design 2 changes include:

• Linear ball bushings will be upgraded to the latest ball bushing technology which will provide increased loadcapability. This upgrade applies only to the 3 larger sizes — 24, 25, and 26. Pages 3-5 of this Technical DataBulletin show revised performance ratings as a result of the new bushings. These graphs supersede thecorresponding graphs in Catalog 93A.

• Retaining rings will now be used to secure both linear ball and T.C. bushings in the slide body on all sizes.This new design provides easy bushings removal and replacement in the field if necessary.

• To accommodate the new snap ring design, the body length has been increased slightly on the model SD23, 24,& 25 only . Page 2 of this Technical Data Bulletin provides you information on the dimensional changes.

SIZE U V W X1 X2 Y Z AB BB CC*** DD EE** HH

22 .160 1.000 2.625 .375 .500 1/4-20 #10-24 x .37 DP 3.070 1/8 NPT* .1884 x .25 DP 1/4 x .575 DP 3.4370 .406

23 0 1.375 3.250 .500 .625 1/4-20 1/4-20 x .40 DP 3.260 1/8 NPT .2509 x .31 DP 5/16 x .455 DP 4.3300 .540

24 .035 1.500 3.625 .625 .750 5/16-18 1/4-20 x .50 DP 3.765 1/8 NPT .2509 x .31 DP 3/8 x .440 DP 5.0000 .688

25 .025 1.875 4.250 .750 1.000 3/8-16 3/8-16 x .69 DP 4.610 1/8 NPT .3759 x .47 DP 3/8 x .658 DP 5.8750 .812

26 .175 2.500 5.750 1.000 1.375 1/2-13 3/8-16 x .75 DP 5.615 1/4 NPT .3759 x .50 DP 1/2 x .700 DP 7.7500 1.000

BORE LETTER DIMENSIONSIZE SIZE A B C D E** F G H J L M O Q R S22 3/4 2.390 .680 1.375 3.800 1.625 3.875 .580 1.000 .790 1.200 .100 .700 #10 x .500 DP .500 .500

23 1 2.875 .385 1.500 4.720 1.875 4.820 .750 1.250 .980 1.500 .125 .950 #10 x .215 DP .625 .750

24 1-1/8 3.390 .375 1.750 5.400 2.000 5.500 .900 1.500 1.480 1.700 .100 .950 1/4 x .275 DP .750 .875

25 1-3/8 3.650 .960 1.750 6.450 2.375 6.550 1.300 2.000 1.500 2.200 .100 1.200 5/16 x .338 DP .875 .875

26 2 5.000 .615 3.000 8.375 3.125 8.500 1.625 2.500 1.700 2.750 .125 1.450 3/8 x .400 DP 1.000 1.500

OPTION ADDERSSIZE PB DB BR AR AE GG/GN GH/GM GI/GO22 .25 1.00 .25 .75 .75 .75 .75 1.5023 .25 1.00 .25 .75 .75 .75 .75 1.5024 .25 1.00 .25 .75 .75 .75 .75 1.5025 0 1.750 .25 .75 .75 .75 .75 1.5026 0 0 .25 .875 .875 .875 .875 1.75

OPTIONAL CC*** DOWEL PIN HOLESSLIDE OPTION J1/J5 OPTION J2/J6

MODEL CLOSE FIT NORMAL FITSxx22 .1884 x .250 DP .1913 x .250 DPSxx23 .2509 x .312 DP .2520 x .312 DPSxx24 .2509 x .312 DP .2520 x .312 DPSxx25 .3759 x .470 DP .3770 x .470 DPSxx26 .3759 x .500 DP .3770 x .500 DP






*** Close fit dowel pins are standard in housing.

DIMENSIONS: SERIES SD SLIDES

NOTES:1) FOR OPTIONS PB AND DB, ADD TO CYLINDER'S LENGTH (AFFECTS DIMENSIONS B, AB)2) FOR OPTIONS BR, AR, GN, AND GH, ADD BETWEEN DIMENSIONS O AND AB3) FOR OPTIONS GM, AE, AND GG, ADD TO DIMENSION U4) FOR OPTIONS GO AND GI, ADD HALF BETWEEN DIMENSIONS O AND AB, AND HALF TO

DIMENSION U5) FOR GRAPHIC DEPICTION OF OPTIONS AND DIMENSIONS, SEE PAGES 5-34 TO 5-39.6) STROKE IS + .030/–.0007) ALL DIMENSIONS ARE CENTERED ON DESIGNATED CENTERLINE OF THE UNIT UNLESS

OTHERWISE SPECIFIED8) PORT LOCATION FOR SDx26 IS NOT ON CENTERLINE9) *PORT IS #10-32 WITH OPTION -PB10) **TOLERANCE IS ±.0008 BETWEEN CLOSE FIT DOWEL PIN HOLES. TOLERANCE IS ± .001

BETWEEN NORMAL FIT DOWEL PIN HOLES

Y THREAD THRU FROM THIS SIDEC'BORED FROM OPPOSITE SIDE

FOR Q SHCS 4 PLACES

F E**

G

O

R

AB + TRAVEL

D E**

A

CS

B + TRAVELU + TRAVEL

HH ± .002

BB PORT2 PLACES

EE**WV SQ

THRU DIA & C'BORE FOR DDSHCS 2 PLACES

J

CC*** ±.0005 DIAMETER FOR DOWEL PINFROM OPPOSITE SIDE2 PLACES IN BODY

Z THREAD FROM OPPOSITE SIDE4 PLACES

X1 SHAFT DIA FOR SDB & SDC UNITSX2 SHAFT DIA FOR SDD UNITS

L H

M

4

2

13

CC*** ± .0005 DIAFOR DOWEL PIN

2 PLACES IN TOOL PLATE

CL

CL

CL

Shaded dimensions on sizes 23, 24, & 25 are revised.






SDB24 WITH 5/8" SHAFTS AND LINEAR BALL BUSHINGS

WEI

GHT

(lb)

TRAVEL (in)

0 10

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

10

20

60

30

40

50

.064

.032.012.006.002

WEI

GHT

(lb)

TRAVEL (in)

0

10

20

60

30

40

50

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18

A- 100 Million Inches of TravelB- 200 Million Inches of Travel

B

A

LOAD VS. LIFE DEFLECTION

SEB24 WITH 5/8" SHAFTS AND LINEAR BALL BUSHINGS

WEI

GHT

(lb)

TRAVEL (in)0

02 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18

10

20

70

30

40

50

.064.032.012.006.002

60

20 22 24

TRAVEL (in)

LOAD VS. LIFE

WEI

GHT

(lb)

0

10

20

60

30

40

50

70

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24


B

A

DEFLECTION

Revised performance graphs: SDB & SEB 24







SDB25 WITH 3/4" SHAFTS AND LINEAR BALL BUSHINGS

WEI

GHT

(lb)

.064

.032.012.006.0020

10

20

70

30

40

50

60

TRAVEL (in)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

LOAD VS. LIFE

WEI

GHT

(lb)

TRAVEL (in)

0

20

40

100

60

80

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18


B

A

DEFLECTION

222018161412108642 24

0

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

0

WEI

GHT

(lb)

TRAVEL (in)

SEB25 WITH 3/4" SHAFTS AND LINEAR BALL BUSHINGS

.064.032.012.005.002

WEI

GHT

(lb)

TRAVEL (in)

LOAD VS. LIFE140

120

100

80

60

40

20

00 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24


B

A

DEFLECTION







TRAVEL (in)

60

SDB26 WITH 1" SHAFTS AND LINEAR BALL BUSHINGS

70

80

90

100

110

120

130

50

40

30

20

10

00 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22

WEI

GHT

(lb) .064

.032.016.009.005.002

WEI

GHT

(lb)

TRAVEL (in)

LOAD VS. LIFE

100

18

150

200

50

016141210 20 2286420


B

A

DEFLECTION

TRAVEL (in)

SEB26 WITH 1" SHAFTS AND LINEAR BALL BUSHINGS

WEI

GHT

(lb)

1816141210 20 2286420 24 26 28

6070

80

90

100

110120

130

50

40

30

20

10

0

140

160

150

.064.032.016.009.005.002

WEI

GHT

(lb)

TRAVEL (in)

LOAD VS. LIFE

100

150

200

50

01816141210 20 2286420 24 26 28


B

A

DEFLECTION


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 7-4-95 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: Series R with Shocks

Make note in your catalog and inform your customer when ordering Series R Slides with shockabsorbers.


Restricted Shock Mounting on Series R Slides

Typically shock absorbers can be mounted on the same side of Series R Slides. However, there are somerestrictions based on the slide's travel length. Shown below are the minimum travel lengths on Series R Slides that allowthe shock absorbers to be mounted on the same side of the unit.

Units with shorter travel lengths do require shocks to be mounted on opposite sides of the slide.

TOP VIEW with Shocks on Same Side

MODEL MINIMUM TRAVELRS04 5"RS06 5"RS08 4"RS10 4"

SD & SE Shock Absorber Catalog Data Correction


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 12-8-95 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SD/SE SLIDES

None.


Page 25 (Catalog S002)Shock Absorber part numbers shown on the bottom of page 25 are old part numbers and should notbe used. The new numbers are shown on page 28.

Page 28 (Catalog S002)Shock Absorber thread type shown on the top of page 28 should be imperial threads instead of themetric threads that are called out.

PHD still has some inventory on the “old” shock absorbers and will honor orders for these until thestock is depleted. Orders after that date will be converted to the new numbers shown on page 28 ofCatalog S002.

These changes apply to Catalog S002 and will be shown correctly in PHD's complete Catalog 96.

PHD SHOCK ACESLIDE ABSORBER CONTROLS ENIDINE*

MODEL SIZE (ACE CONTROLS) PART NO. PART NO.SD/SE 22, 23 54007-04-1 MS-200-1777 SP-9304

24, 25, 26 54007-05-1 MS-500-1778 SP-9305

OLDNUMBERS

NEW (CORRECT)NUMBERS

SHOCKABSORBER

WEIGHT(Lbs)0.250.250.670.670.67

ETCTOTAL ENERGY

PER HOUR(In. Lbs/hour)

400,000400,000600,000600,000600,000

ET

TOTAL ENERGY PER CYCLE

(In. Lbs)4080140220415

THREADTYPE

3/4-16 UNF3/4-16 UNF1-12 UNF1-12 UNF1-12 UNF

STROKE(In)0.750.751.001.001.00

PHD SHOCKABSORBER

NO.57057-02-x57057-02-x57057-03-x57057-03-x57057-03-x

SLIDESIZE2223242526


REQUIRED ACTION:

- TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL26

DATE: 2-9-96 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES B, R, & T SLIDES

None.


-H to -H1 Option Code ChangeIn an effort to maintain consistency and eliminate confusion, PHD is standardizing on the option code“-H1” for designating the “slide only” option. This change applies to Series B, R, & T Slides whichformerly used the “-H” callout. The “-H1” callout is now consistent with the newer slides (Series SD &SE and SG). Catalog 96 and future price lists will reflect this code change.

TS 03 1 x 2 x 1 - - M-V

MODELTS - Slide - 150 psi Air max.TH - Slide - 150 psi Hyd. max.TT - Tandem - Air/oil cylinder with 150 psi Air max.

TOOL PLATE EXTENSIONAdditional distance between tool plate andbearing block in 1" increments. Leaveblank if no additional extension is required.

CYLINDER OPTIONS

A

H1BDEMV

- Slide with no cylinder supplied- Shock Pads on both ends (TS Models only)- Cushions on both ends (TS Models only)- Magnetic Piston (Hall Effect)- Magnetic Piston (Reed)- Viton Seals

NOW -H1EXAMPLE:



DATE: 7-1-96 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 4 � MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES S SLIDES


Design Change on Series SA/SB 03, 04 and 06 SlidesAnd Standardization of -R1 Close Fit Dowel Pin Holes on All Sizes

PHD has begun phasing in design revisions to the Sx03, Sx04, and Sx06 size slides. The phase-inperiod for the Sx03 and Sx06 sizes began July 1, 1996 and the anticipated date for the Sx04 size isSeptember 1, 1996. The design changes to the slides maintain the same mounting pattern, allowinga direct interchange with the previous design. Option -R1 (Close Fit Dowel Pin holes in the slidebody) is now standard on all sizes of Series SA and SB Slides.

PHD will publish a complete catalog and parts list in September once the Sx04 size phase-in iscompleted.

Page 2 Ordering Data RevisionsPage 3 Dimensional RevisionsPage 4 Dimensional and Specification Revisions

REQUIRED ACTION:None Required. PHD will convert orders to the new units and kits as needed. You may want to letyour customers know, to minimize questions and confusion.

Option -R1 (Close Fit DowelPin Holes in the Slide Body)is now standard on all sizes.



DATE: 7-1-96 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 2 OF 4 � MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES S SLIDES


Design Change on Series SA/SB 03, 04 and 06 SlidesAnd Standardization of -R1 Close Fit Dowel Pin Holes on All Sizes

Also affected by the designchanges are the Proximity Switchready kits and Shock pad andCollar Kits. Listed at left are thenew kit numbers where applicable.

-R1 OPTION WAS REMOVED FROMTHE ORDERING DATA.

IT IS NOW STANDARD ON ALL UNITS.

01 2 702 2 703 3 804 4 906 3 8

KIT NUMBERIMPERIAL METRIC

19451 1945619452 1945760399 6089060581 6120759037 61191

UNITSIZE0102030406

UNITSIZE0102030406

J1

J2

Q1Q6R2

Z1

01 - 5/16" bore cylinder with3/16" diameter guide shaft,5 mm diameter guide shaft

02 - 3/8" bore cylinder with1/4" diameter guide shaft6 mm diameter guide shaft

03 - 12 mm bore cylinder with10 mm diameter guide shaft

04 - 20 mm bore cylider with16 mm diameter guide shaft

06 - 32 mm bore cylinder with20 mm diameter guide shaft

SA

TO ORDER SPECIFY:Series, Size, Design No., Slide Travel,and Options.

01 3 x

DESIGN NO.SIZE IMPERIAL UNITS METRIC UNITS

SIZE IMPERIAL TRAVEL

1-1/2

1) Shock pads are standard on retract only forsizes 01, 02, and 03.Shock pads are located on guide shafts.Shock pads are standard on extend and retractfor sizes 04 and 06.Retract shock pads are located on the guide shafts.Extend shock pad is located internally on the piston.

2) Stop collars are recommended for high cycle speedapplications and high load applications. Extend shockpads are included with the stop collars to remove theimpact load from the piston rod. Stop collars may beused as travel adjustment.

3) Barb fittings are included with 01, 02, and 03 size slides.

NOTES:

Q1-

01 - 1/2, 1, 1-1/202 - 1/2, 1, 1-1/203 - 1/2, 1, 1-1/204 - 1, 2, 306 - 1, 2, 3

Tolerance for Travellength is + .060, – .000.

SA - Standard mounting holes in tool plateSB - Mounting holes in tool plate for PHD

Transition PlatesNOTE: See Dimension pages of Catalog 96 forlocations and tolerances of dowel pin holes.

SERIES

SIZE inMETRIC TRAVEL

01 - 12, 25, 4002 - 12, 25, 4003 - 12, 25, 4004 - 25, 50, 7506 - 25, 50, 75

Tolerance for Strokelength is +.1.0, -0.0

See page 5-11 of Catalog 96 or page4 of this bulletin for more information.

COLLAR AND SHOCK PAD KITSPROXIMITY SWITCH READY KITS

For use with Series 5580 6 mmHall Effect Switches. See page5-11 of Catalog 96 or page 4 ofthis bulletin for more information.


55967 1946655969 1946760417 6042060584 6060860363 59824

SIZE in

OPTIONS- Close fit dowel pin holes in the tool plate

(Standard on metric units)- Normal fit dowel pin holes in the tool plate

(For imperial units only)- Corrosion resistant guide shafts, raw ends- Total corrosion resistant guide shafts- Normal fit dowel pin holes in the slide body

(For imperial units only)- Electroless nickel plating of ferrous parts

To reflect the changes to the Sx03, Sx04, and Sx06 sizes, the design number has been changed.Shaded areas indicate changes to the ordering data.

Following are new dimensional drawings for the Series S Slides.Shaded areas indicate changes from the previous design.

DIMENSIONS: SERIES SA & SB SLIDES

MOU

NTIN

G HO

LES:

CEN

TERE

D ON

DES

IGNA

TED

CENT

ERLI

NE**

DOW

EL P

IN H

OLES

TOL

ERAN

CE IS

± .0

005

[±.0

127]

***-

J1 IS

STA

NDAR

D ON

MET

RIC

UNIT

S ON

LY

Sx01

2

[Sx0

17]

Sx02

2

[Sx0

27]

Sx03

3

[Sx0

38]

Sx04

4

[Sx0

49]

Sx06

3

[Sx0

68]

AA (-

J1)

CLOS

E FI

T

D4X

K T

HREA

D TH

RU

EF

2X Ø

AA

± .0

005

(-J1

)***

[+0.

025/

.000

]DOW

EL P

INOP

TION

AL G

G DI

M(F

OR -J

2 OP

TION

)

V ±

.002

[±.0

5]

C **

C **

4X Y

THR

EAD

FROM

OPP

OSIT

ESI

DE C

'BOR

EFR

OM T

HIS

SIDE

FOR

Q SH

CS2X

BB

PORT 2X

Ø X

SHA

FT

2X Ø

AA

± .0

005

STAN

DARD

[+.0

25/.0

00] D

OWEL

PIN

FRO

MOP

POSI

TE S

IDE

OF U

NIT

OPTI

ONAL

GG

DIM

(FOR

-R2

OPTI

ON)

SHOC

K PA

D RE

F

V ±

.002

NR

W

2X T

HREA

DED

HOLE

FOR

PROX

IMIT

Y SW

ITCH

BRA

CKET

SEE

OPTI

ON P

AGE

FOR

DETA

IL

A +

TRAV

ELP

RETR

ACTE

DO

BC

S

U +

TRAV

EL

G

CC

DD

H/2

HL

SLID

EM

ODEL

GG (-

J2, -

R2)

NORM

AL F

IT

.063

4

[2 x

4DP

]

.094

7

[2.5

x 5

DP]

.125

9

[3 x

6 D

P]

.188

4

[4 x

8 D

P]

.250

9

[6 x

12

DP]

.064

5

—

.095

8

—

.127

0

—

.189

5

—

.252

0

—

DOW

EL P

IN H

OLE

THRU

DIA

AND

C'B

ORE

FOR

EE S

HCS

FROM

OPPO

SITE

SID

E4

PLAC

ES

FF

G

PRE

TRAC

TED

O

SHOC

K PA

D RE

F

SERI

ES S

B

M

SLOT

FOR

PRO

XIM

ITY

SWIT

CHSE

E OP

TION

PAG

E FO

R DE

TAIL T Z

J

C L

C L

C L

C L

All dimensions are reference only unless specifically toleranced.

BM

ODEL

BORE

SIZE

Sx01

2

[Sx0

17]

Sx02

2

[Sx0

27]

Sx03

3

[Sx0

38]

Sx04

4

[Sx0

49]

Sx06

3

[Sx0

68]

DD .031 [1]

.062 [2]

.094

[2.5]

.125 [4]

.125 [3]

CC .27

[8]

.52

[14]

.769 [20]

1.14

5

[28]

1.52

[38.5

]

Z N/A

[N/A

]

.625

[17.5

]

.866 [22]

1.12

5

[28.5

]

1.49

6

[38]

Y

4-40

x .2

5 DP

[M3

x .5

x 8 D

P]

6-32

x .3

75 D

P

[M4

x .7

x 10

DP]

10-2

4 x

.5 D

P

[M5

x .8

x 12.

5 DP

]

1/4-

20 x

.625

DP

[M6

x 1 x

16 D

P]

5/16

-18

x .8

75 D

P

[M8

x 1.2

5 x 2

0 DP

]

X

.188 [5]

.25

[6]

.394 [10]

.472 [12]

.787 [20]

W 1 [26]

1.12

5

[30]

1.61

4

[41]

2.12

6

[54]

2.87

5

[73]

V

.219 [6]

.25

[7]

.369

[9.5]

.438 [12]

.594

[15.5

]

U

.438 [12]

.438 [12]

.558

[14.5

]

.709 [18]

.884 [22]

T N/A

[N/A

]

.375 [9]

.512 [13] .75

[19]

.974 [24]

S .281 [7]

.312 [8]

.438 [11]

.625 [15]

.844 [21]

R .375

[9.5]

.375 [10] .5 [12]

.594 [15]

.625 [16]

Q

#2 x

.245

DP

[M2.5

]

#4 x

.23

DP

[M3]

#6 x

.198

DP

[M4]

#10

x .2

15 D

P

[M5]

1/4

x .2

75 D

P

[M6]

P .437

[11.5

]

.437

[11.5

]

.562

[15.5

]

.875 [23]

1.19

7

[31]

O .375 [10]

.375 [10] .5 [14] .75

[20] 1.0

[26]

N .5 [13]

.469 [12]

.625 [15] .75

[19]

.813 [21]

M .515 [14] .75

[20]

.973 [25]

1.34

3

[34]

1.78

8

[45]

L

.515 [14]

.781 [21]

1.00

8

[26]

1.49

5

[38]

1.98

6

[49.5

]

K

3-48

[ M2.

5 x .

45]

4-40

[M3 x

.5]

6-32

[M4 x

.7]

10-2

4

[M5 x

.8]

1/4-

20

[M6 x

1]

J

.515 [14] .75

[20]

.973 [25]

1.43

5

[36]

1.94

6

[48.5

]

H .438 [12]

.625 [16]

.812 [21]

1.25 [30]

1.75 [44]

G .25

[8]

.375 [10] .5 [14] .75

[20] 1 [26]

F

1.37

5

[36]

1.62

5

[44]

2.24

4

[57] 3 [76]

3.39

8

[100

]

E .625 [16] .75

[20] 1 [26] 1.5

[40] 2 [52]

D .25

[7]

.375 [10] .5 [13] .75

[19] 1 [25]

C**

.562 [14]

.625 [16]

.875 [22]

1.25 [30]

1.68

8

[42]

.562 [14]

.562 [14]

.562 [14]

.625 [18]

.812 [22]

A

1.12

5

[30]

1.12

5

[30]

1.37

5

[35]

1.87

5

[48]

2.12

6

[54]

5/16 [8]

3/8

[10]

[12]

[12]

[20]

[20]

[20]

[32]

LETT

ER D

IMEN

SION

FF .375 [8] .5 [10] .75

[14] 1 [20] 1.5

[26]

EE

#3 x

.115

DP

[10]

#4 x

.115

DP

[10]

#6 x

.23

DP

[18]

#10

x .2

15 D

P

[24]

1/4

x .3

55 D

P

[38]

BB 3-56

[M3 x

.5]

10-3

2

[M5 x

.8]

10-3

2

[M5 x

.8]

1/8

NPT

[G1/8

BSP

]

1/8

NPT

[G1/8

BSP

]

Num

bers

in [

] are

in m

m o

r for

met

ric u

nits

.

PRESSURE RATINGSAll Series S Slides have a maximum working pressure rating of

150 psi air and are for pneumatic use only.

ENGINEERING DATA: SERIES S SLIDES

.625 [N/A]

.688 [18.0]

.875 [22.2]

1.125 [28.5]

1.500 [38.0]

01

02

03*

04*

06*

19456

19457

60890

61207

61191

UNITSIZE

EACH COLLAR AND SHOCK PAD KITCONTAINS THE FOLLOWING ITEMS:

2 STEEL SHAFT COLLARS 2 SHOCK PADS 2 SHCS

LETTER DIMENSION [mm]KIT NUMBERIMPERIAL METRIC A

.365 [9.0]

.437 [13.0]

.591 [15.0]

.875 [22.2]

1.125 [28.5]

B.062 [1.5]

.062 [1.5]

.062 [1.5]

.118 [3.0]

.197 [5.0]

C.312 [8.0]

.312 [8.0]

.433 [11.0]

.511 [13.0]

.590 [15.0]

D

.625 DIA

Sx012 MODEL ONLY

.458.229

[13.0][6.5]

[6.0]

Sx017 MODEL ONLY

[16.0]

19451

19452

60399

60581

59037

*NEW DESIGN KITS ONLY. CANNOT BE USED FOR PHASED OUT DESIGNS.

REED SWITCHES

19466

19467

60420

60608

59824

55967

55969

60417

60584

60363

01

02

03*

04*

06*

UNITSIZE


EACH PROXIMITY SWITCH READY KITCONTAINS THE FOLLOWING ITEMS:

1 TARGET PIN WITH MAGNET2 STEEL SHAFT COLLARS

(ONE WITH MAGNETIC TARGET)2 SHOCK PADS2 SWITCH MOUNTING BRACKETS2 4-40 x .500 SHCS

SERIES 5580 SWITCHES AREORDERED SEPARATELY.

MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION55803-1-0255804-1-02

55823-155824-1

NPN 4.5 - 24 VDC WITH 2 METER CABLEPNP 4.5 - 24 VDC WITH 2 METER CABLENPN 4.5 - 24 VDC WITH QUICK CONNECTPNP 4.5 - 24 VDC WITH QUICK CONNECT

MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION

18431-001-02

18431-002-02

NPN 10 - 30 VDCWITH 2 METER CABLE

PNP 10 - 30 VDCWITH 2 METER CABLE

SEE SECTION 7 OF CATALOG 96 FORSWITCH INFORMATION

.225[5.5]

TARGET FORRETRACT SENSING

PROXIMITY SWITCH

.135 [3.5]1.18 [30.0]

STEEL SHAFT COLLAR IS TARGET FOREXTEND SENSING PROXIMITY SWITCH

OPTIONAL6 mm [2 m] SQUARE PROXIMITYSWITCH WITH 6 FT CABLE LENGTH

.408[10.5]

.204 [5.0]

.500 [12.5].337 [8.5]

.296[7.5]

PROXIMITY SWITCHMOUNTING BRACKET

2X .250 WIDE SLOT x .015 DEEP[6.5 x 0.38]

4-40 x .500 SHCS[M3 x 0.5 x 16.0]

*NEW DESIGN KITS ONLY. CANNOT BE USED FOR PHASED OUT DESIGNS.

HALL EFFECT SWITCHES 6mm SQUARE INDUCTIVEPROXIMITY SWITCH

MODEL NO. DESCRIPTION

55802-1-02

55822-1

NPN OR PNP 4.5 - 24 VDCWITH 2 METER CABLE

NPN OR PNP 4.5 - 24 VDCWITH QUICK CONNECT

SHOCK PAD

SHCS SHAFT COLLAR

D DIA

CB

A DIA

PROXIMITY SWITCH READY KITS

COLLAR AND SHOCK PAD KITS

OPERATING TEMPERATURE AND SEALSThe standard slide has Buna-N seals for general use between

-20° and +180°F. They are compatible with standard paraffin-basedhydraulic oil used for lubrication of air cylinders.

Numbers in [ ] are in mm or for metric units.

Following are affected changes to specifications on the revised sizes. Shaded areas indicatechanges from the previous design.

SPECIFICATIONS

GUIDE EFFECTIVE PISTON LOAD CAPACITY lb [N] UNIT WEIGHT lb [g]UNIT BORE SHAFTS AREA in2 [cm2] ATTACHED UNATTACHED STATIC TRAVELSIZE in [cm2] in [cm2] EXTEND RETRACT DYNAMIC DYNAMIC 1/2 [12] 1 [25] 1-1/2 [40] 2 [50] 3 [75]

01 5/16 [8.0] 3/16 [5.0] .076 [0.49] .057 [0.36] .375 [1.5] 1.88 [8.0] 3.75 [16.50] .188 [85] .240 [109] .294 [133] — — — —

02 3/8 [9.5] 1/4 [6.0] .110 [0.71] .082 [0.53] .75 [3.0] 3.75 [16.50] 7.50 [33.0] .294 [133] .388 [176] .480 [218] — — — —

03 .472 [12.0] .394 [10.0] .175 [1.13] .132 [0.85] 2.00 [8.50] 10.00 [44.0] 20.00 [88.0] .562 [255] .718 [325] .875 [397] — — — —

04 .787 [20.0] .472 [12.0] .487 [3.14] .409 [2.64] 5.00 [22.0] 25.00[111.0] 50.00 [222.0] — — 1.637 [742] — — 2.216 [1005] 2.794 [1267]

06 1.260 [32.0] .787 [20.0] 1.247 [8.05] 1.071 [6.91] 10.00 [44.50] 50.00[222.0] 100.00[444.0] — — 3.494[1585] — — 4.598 [2085] 5.700[2585]


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 7-1-96 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SK/SL SLIDES

None. PHD will flag any orders received.


Revised Minimum Travel on SK/SL SlidesThe ordering data for Series SK/SL Slides in Catalog 96 incorrectly shows minimum travel lengthsoffered in addition to minimum travel lengths available. Shown below in shaded areas are correctminimum travel lengths available.

SLIDE SHAFT SIZETYPE SIZE DIA. (mm)

C 51 8D 51 10 (oversize)C 52 10D 52 12 (oversize)C 53 12D 53 16 (oversize)C 54 16D 54 20 (oversize)C 55 20D 55 25 (oversize)C 66 25D 66 30 (oversize)E 66 35 (oversize)

SIZE SERIES K SERIES L51 25 mm to 300 mm 25 mm to 300 mm52 25 mm to 300 mm 25 mm to 300 mm53 25 mm to 300 mm 25 mm to 450 mm54 50 mm to 450 mm 50 mm to 600 mm55 50 mm to 450 mm 50 mm to 600 mm66 50 mm to 550 mm 50 mm to 700 mm

Available in 5 mm increments. Minimum travelrequired for all SK or SL Slides for use with ISOcylinders is:Size 51 25 mm Size 54 50 mmSize 52 25 mm Size 55 50 mmSize 53 25 mm Size 66 50 mm

Slide travel will be 0.5 to 1.0 mm less than theISO cylinder stroke on -H11 or -H12 units whenproperly adjusted.

TO ORDER SPECIFY:Product, Series, Type, Slide Size, Slide Travel, and Options.

x –x –

NOTES:1) -BR not available with tool plate extension.2) *Unit dimensions are affected by these options. See Catalog 96 drawings for complete details. Shock

pads come standard with the travel adjustment options and do not need to be specified separately whentravel adjustment is ordered.

3) **Shock absorber ready options include shock absorber stop brackets mounted on the shaft, a stopcollar on the opposite shaft, and threaded holes in the slide body for mounting the shock.

4) Cylinder Proximity Switch Mounting Brackets and Shock Absorbers must be ordered separately.

K- Short bodyL - Long body

PRODUCTS - Slide

SERIES

SLIDE TRAVEL

DB- Adjustable cushions on extension and retraction*E - Hall Effect magnetic pistonM - Reed switch magnetic piston

WITH CYLINDER OPTIONS

This option is required for slide with user supplied ISO Cylinder.H11- Slide for VDMA/ISO cylinders (54, 55, and 66 sizes only)H12- Slide for ISO cylinder (51, 52, and 53 sizes only)

WITHOUT CYLINDER OPTION

AE - Travel adjustment and shock pads on extension*AR - Travel adjustment and shock pads on retraction*BR - Shock pads on retraction*BS - Shock pads on extension for use with options GM or GO onlyBT - Shock pads on retraction for use with option GN or GO onlyGG - Travel adjustment and shock pads on extension with provisions

for proximity switches in both directions*GH - Travel adjustment and shock pads on retraction with provisions

for proximity switches on retractionGI - Travel adjustments, shock pads and provisions for proximity

switches on both endsGM - Shock absorber ready on extension**GN - Shock absorber ready on retraction**GO - Shock absorber ready on extension and retraction**GV - Side mounting holes in position number 2Q1 - Corrosion resistant guide shafts (ends unplated)

SLIDE OPTIONSAdditional distance between tool plate andbearing body in 1 mm increments. Leaveblank if additional extension is not required.Minimum tool plate extension for all SKslides only with ISO cylinders is 50 mm, iftool extension is required.

TOOL PLATE EXTENSION

SLIDES WITH TCCOMPOSITE BUSHINGS

SLIDES WITH LINEARBALL BUSHINGS

53BKS

SLIDE SHAFT SIZETYPE SIZE DIA. (mm)

B 51 8B 52 10B 53 12B 54 16B 55 20B 66 25

With Cylinder Example: S K B 5 3 x 1 0 0 - E - A R - G M - B SWithout Cylinder Example: S K B 5 3 x 1 0 0 - H 1 2 - A R - G M - B S

DB – E25100 AR – GM – BS


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 2/13/98 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SA/SB

Inform current customers of SA/SB 033 and 038 of this modification.


Snap Ring Groove Modification

A modification has been made toSeries SA/SB 033 and 038 size slide.The snap ring groove holding theinternal bushing in the body has beenmoved back .050" to provide a morerobust design. To accommodate this,the bushing has been shortened by.050". This revision to the body will bephased-in as current inventory isdepleted. To support this modification,all repair kits currently being shippedcontain the shortened bushing withtwo seal retainers. When repairingunits in the field, two seal retainerswill be required for pre-modifiedbodies, and one seal retainer formodified bodies. Again, this affectsonly the series 03 slides.

® REPAIR KIT FORSERIES: SA033 & SA038

SB033 & SB038

PACKER # 6441-270

Due to design changes to the bushing and body, some units may require theuse of 2 seal retainers, which are included with this kit. The original may haveused only 1 seal retainer. See assembly instructions below.

Insert the new bushing, rod seal, bushing and cap seal, and seal retainer intothe slide body. If a gap of more than .050 or 1.27 mm (equal to the thicknessof 1 seal retainer) exists between the seal retainer and the snap ring groove,the second seal retainer is required.

BUSHING

POSSIBLE .050 OR 1.27 mm GAP

SEALRETAINER

SNAP RINGGROOVE

BUSHING AND CAP SEAL


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 5/29/98 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SA AND SB

Inform future purchasers of the size SA017 and SB017 slides.


Mounting Screw Size Change

Effective immediately, PHD has changed the specification of the socket head cap screw size formounting the SA017 and SB017 slides. An M2 socket head cap screw is now specified from theprevious M2.5. Reference page 5B-4 in Catalog 98.

DD

.031

[1]

.062

[2]

.094

[2.5]

.125

[4]

.125

[3]

CC

.27

[8]

.52

[14]

.769

[20]

1.145

[28]

1.52

[38.5]

AA

—

[2 x 4 DP]

—

[2.5 x 5 DP]

—

[3 x 6 DP]

—

[4 x 8 DP]

—

[6 x 12 DP]

Z

N/A

[N/A]

.625

[17.5]

.866

[22]

1.125

[28.5]

1.496

[38]

Y

4-40 x .25 DP

[M3 x .5 x 8 DP]

6-32 x .375 DP

[M4 x .7 x 10 DP]

10-24 x .5 DP

[M5 x .8 x 12.5 DP]

1/4-20 x .625 DP

[M6 x 1 x 16 DP]

5/16-18 x .875 DP

[M8 x 1.25 x 20 DP]

X

.188

[5]

.25

[6]

.394

[10]

.472

[12]

.787

[20]

W

1

[26]

1.125

[30]

1.614

[41]

2.126

[54]

2.875

[73]

V

.219

[6]

.25

[7]

.369

[9.5]

.438

[12]

.594

[15.5]

U

.438

[12]

.438

[12]

.558

[14.5]

.709

[18]

.884

[22]

T

N/A

[N/A]

.375

[9]

.512

[13]

.75

[19]

.974

[24]

S

.281

[7]

.312

[8]

.438

[11]

.625

[15]

.844

[21]

R

.375

[9.5]

.375

[10]

.5

[12]

.594

[15]

.625

[16]

Q

#2 x .245 DP

[M2]

#4 x .23 DP

[M3]

#6 x .198 DP

[M4]

#10 x .215 DP

[M5]

1/4 x .275 DP

[M6]

P

.437

[11.5]

.437

[11.5]

.562

[15.5]

.875

[23]

1.197

[31]

O

.375

[10]

.375

[10]

.5

[14]

.75

[20]

1.0

[26]

N

.5

[13]

.469

[12]

.625

[15]

.75

[19]

.813

[21]

M

.515

[14]

.75

[20]

.973

[25]

1.343

[34]

1.788

[45]

L

.515

[14]

.781

[21]

1.008

[26]

1.495

[38]

1.986

[49.5]

K

3-48

[M2.5 x .45]

4-40

[M3 x .5]

6-32

[M4 x .7]

10-24

[M5 x .8]

1/4-20

[M6 x 1]

J

.515

[14]

.75

[20]

.973

[25]

1.435

[36]

1.946

[48.5]

H

.438

[12]

.625

[16]

.812

[21]

1.25

[30]

1.75

[44]

G

.25

[8]

.375

[10]

.5

[14]

.75

[20]

1

[26]

F

1.375

[36]

1.625

[44]

2.244

[57]

3

[76]

3.938

[100]

E

.625

[16]

.75

[20]

1

[26]

1.5

[40]

2

[52]

D

.25

[7]

.375

[10]

.5

[13]

.75

[19]

1

[25]

C**

.562

[14]

.625

[16]

.875

[22]

1.25

[30]

1.688

[42]

B

.562

[14]

.562

[14]

.562

[14]

.625

[18]

.812

[22]

A

1.125

[30]

1.125

[30]

1.375

[35]

1.875

[48]

2.126

[54]

BORESIZE

5/16

[8]

3/8

[10]

[12]

[12]

[20]

[20]

[32]

[32]

MODELSx012

[Sx017]

Sx022

[Sx027]

Sx033

[Sx038]

Sx044

[Sx049]

Sx063

[Sx068]

LETTER DIMENSIONFF

.375

[10]

.5

[10]

.75

[18]

1

[24]

1.5

[38]

EE

#3 x .115 ± .010 DP

[M2 x 2.62 ± .25 DP]

#4 x .115 ± .010 DP

[M3 x 3.63 ± .25 DP]

#6 x .230 ± .020 DP

[M4 x 4.65 ± .50 DP]

#10 x .215 ± .020 DP

[M5 x 5.61 ± .50 DP]

1/4 x .355 ± .020 DP

[M6 x 6.63 ± .50 DP]

BB

3-56

[M3 x .5]

10-32

[M5 x .8]

10-32

[M5 x .8]

1/8 NPT

[G1/8 BSP]

1/8 NPT

[G1/8 BSP]

CLC*

4X Y THREADFROM OPPOSITE

SIDE C'BOREFROM THIS SIDE

FOR Q SHCS 2X BB PORT

2X Ø X SHAFT

SHOCK PAD REF

V ± .002 [± .05]

N R

W

2X THREADED HOLE FORPROXIMITY SWITCH BRACKETSEE OPTION PAGE FOR DETAIL

A + TRAVELPRETRACTED

O B CS

U + TRAVEL

2X Ø AA ± .0005 STANDARD[+.025/.000] DOWEL PIN FROMOPPOSITE SIDE OF UNITOPTIONAL GG DIM(FOR -R2 OPTION)

Numbers in [ ] are in mm or for metric units.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 8/27/99 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SK AND SL

Inform current customers of this product's changes.


Design Change to Series SK/SL Slides

Effective October 1999, PHD will implement a design change to sizes 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 on SeriesSK/SL. Size 1 will not be affected. The significant change involves replacing the existingcylinders with the Series CV ISO Cylinders. Following are comparison charts showing the majorchanges in bore size, effective piston area, and slide length. PHD will release a revised catalogupon implementation of the redesign.

BORE Ø EFFECTIVE PISTON AREA mm2 KK DIMEXTEND RETRACT SK SL

OLD NEW OLD NEW OLD NEW OLD NEW OLD NEWSIZE 2 25.4 20 507 314 436 264 108 116 140 148SIZE 3 28.6 25 642 491 572 412 111 125 146 160SIZE 4 38.1 32 1142 804 944 691 155.5 148 192.5 185SIZE 5 50.8 40 2030 1257 1830 1056 159 166 199 206SIZE 6 63.5 50 3170 1963 2970 1649 173.5 178 223.5 228

DIMENSIONS IN ARE IN mm.

UNIT

KK + TRAVEL


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 3-5-02 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 5 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SGxM

Inform potential customers of the Series SGxM of these revisions.


Design Change to Series SGxM SlidesAs a result of a vendor change, effective immediately the Series SGxM Slide’s design number has beenchanged from -2 to -3 for imperial units and from -6 to -7 for metric. Specifically, the changes affectdimensions of the switches, brackets, and switch mounting grooves on the rodless cylinder. The followingpages indicate updated ordering data, dimensional drawings, elimination of the L4 option, and switch partnumbers and associated data.

In addition, revisions to calculations for determining maximum static loads are included. This change is aseparate issue not associated with the above revisions.

Shaded areas indicate revised data to section 5D of Catalog 2002. Please keep this bulletin with your catalogfor future reference.

TO ORDER SPECIFY:Product, Series, Type, Cylinder Option,Design No., Size, Travel, and Options.

NOTES:1) All units are shock absorber ready as standard. Shock absorber

kits are ordered separately. See Slides section of PHD’s maincatalog for complete ordering information.

2) Shock absorbers are not plated with -Z1 option.3) SGxM cylinder section comes standard with cushions and

magnetic piston on both ends.4) Option -CB provides targets for use with 8 mm barrel

proximity switches.5) See page 14 for directions nominated extension and retraction

when ordering -BE or -BR options.6) Option -BB and -BR are not available together with shock

absorbers.7) See pages 16 and 17 for switch information.

x –

DESIGN NO.3 - Imperial7 - Metric

3 3 6 BB – Q1 – Z1

SLIDE OPTIONSBB - Shock Pad both directionsBE - Shock Pad on extensionBR - Shock Pad on retractionCB - Proximity Switch ready both ends (See Note 4)GY - Saddle mounting in position 1

(Not available on size 3 slide)L6 - Lube fitting in saddle in position 3Q1 - Corrosion-resistant guide shafts (ends unplated)Z1 - Electroless nickel plated ferrous metal parts

TYPEB - Standard linear

ball bushing,standard shaft

C - TC bushing,standard shaft

D - TC bushing,oversize shaft

PRODUCTS - Slide

GS B

SERIESG - Gantry

CYLINDER OPTIONM - Rodless cylinder mounted

M

SLIDE TRAVEL (in)SIZE IMPERIAL UNITS23 1 to 1624 1 to 2025 1 to 2426 1 to 36

Available in1/4" increments.

SLIDE TRAVEL [mm]SIZE METRIC UNITS63 25 to 40564 25 to 51065 25 to 61066 25 to 915

Available in5 mm increments.

SIZE3 - 25 mm rodless cylinder with 12 mm

shaft standard, 16 mm shaft oversize4 - 25 mm rodless cylinder with 16 mm



shaft standard, 30 mm shaft oversize

SHOCK ABSORBER KITS (See Note 1)SHOCK ABS. NO.

57858-01-x57858-02-x

SLIDE MODELSGxMx3

SGxMx4, SGxMx5, SGxMx6

H39–

-L4 and -R Options removed-Refer to Catalog 2002,Page 5D-24





EE

B + TRAVEL

HH

GGII

A + TRAVELMM

MM

OOCL

NN

4X THRU Ø & COUNTERBOREFOR S SHCS

J

JJG

L

4X T THREAD THIS SIDE,COUNTERBORE FROM THE

OPPOSITE SIDE FORQ SHCS

R

E*

FP

M

O

2X Ø X1 SHAFT FORSGB & SGC UNITS

2X Ø X2 SHAFT FORSGD UNIT

C + TRAVEL

N

D

1/2 [12.7] MAX TRAVELADJUSTMENT

K BOTH ENDS

O

Ø R +.001/-.000[+.025/-.000] FORDOWEL PIN, U DP

W

2

1

4

3

CC

2X Ø Z +.001/-.000[+.025/-.000] FORDOWEL PIN, AA DP

CL

Y

I

1 [25.4] MAXTRAVEL

ADJUSTMENT

DD

LL + TRAVEL

2X KK THD THRUSHOCK MOUNTING HOLE

FF

H

6X BB PORTS

2X CUSHIONNEEDLE THISSIDE ONLY

E*

*DIMENSION E IS FROM CENTERLINE OF GUIDE SHAFT.

EXTENSION END RETRACTION END

CANTILEVERSK/SLxx72SK/SLxx73SK/SLxx74SK/SLxx75

GANTRYSGxx73SGxx74SGxx75SGxx76

DOWEL PINSØ 8mm x 20Ø 8mm x 20Ø 8mm x 20Ø 8mm x 20

SHCSM6 x 45mmM8 x 55mm

M10 x 60mmM12 x 70mm

STANDARD65578-02-165578-03-165578-04-165578-05-1

-Z1 OPTION 65578-02-265578-03-265578-04-265578-05-2

MODULAR DESIGN HARDWARE HARDWARE KITS

SERIES SK/SL SLIDE TO SERIES SG WITH RODLESS CYLINDER SLIDE

Refer to Catalog 2002,Page 5D-26






TORSIONAL DEFLECTIONCALCULATIONS

TQ x (T + 3.996) x 3.261 x 10-5 = AngleTQ x (T + 3.996) x 1.033 x 10-5 = AngleTQ x (T + 4.744) x 1.033 x 10-5 = AngleTQ x (T + 4.744) x 4.225 x 10-6 = AngleTQ x (T + 5.750) x 4.225 x 10-6 = AngleTQ x (T + 5.750) x 1.731 x 10-6 = AngleTQ x (T + 6.750) x 1.731 x 10-6 = AngleTQ x (T + 6.750) x 8.342 x 10-7 = Angle

IMPERIAL UNITSGBM33, SGCM33SGDM33SGBM34, SGCM34SGDM34SGBM35, SGCM35SGDM35SGBM36, SGCM36SGDM36

TQ x (T + 101.5) x 1.136 x 10-5 = AngleTQ x (T + 101.5) x 3.600 x 10-6 = AngleTQ x (T + 120.5) x 3.600 x 10-6 = AngleTQ x (T + 120.5) x 1.472 x 10-6 = AngleTQ x (T + 146.0) x 1.472 x 10-6 = AngleTQ x (T + 146.0) x 6.031 x 10-7 = AngleTQ x (T + 171.5) x 6.031 x 10-7 = AngleTQ x (T + 171.5) x 2.906 x 10-7 = Angle

SGBM73, SGCM73SGDM73SGBM74, SGCM74SGDM74SGBM75, SGCM75SGDM75SGBM76, SGCM76SGDM76

METRIC UNIT

TQ = Torque in-lb [Nm] (L x Force)

T = Saddle travel inch [mm]Angle = Degrees

LFORCE

ANGLE

LFORCE

ANGLE

TQ x (T + 3.996)3 x 1.71 x 10-8 = Tangent of AngleTQ x (T + 3.996)3 x 6.11 x 10-9 = Tangent of AngleTQ x (T + 4.744)3 x 3.62 x 10-9 = Tangent of AngleTQ x (T + 4.744)3 x 2.35 x 10-9 = Tangent of AngleTQ x (T + 5.750)3 x 1.73 x 10-9 = Tangent of AngleTQ x (T + 5.750)3 x 7.48 x 10-10 = Tangent of AngleTQ x (T + 6.750)3 x 6.69 x 10-10 = Tangent of AngleTQ x (T + 6.750)3 x 3.22 x 10-10 = Tangent of Angle

IMPERIAL UNITSGBM33, SGCM33SGDM33SGBM34, SGCM34SGDM34SGBM35, SGCM35SGDM35SGBM36, SGCM36SGDM36

TQ x (T + 101.5)3 x 9.23 x 10-12 = Tangent of AngleTQ x (T + 101.5)3 x 3.30 x 10-12 = Tangent of AngleTQ x (T + 120.5)3 x 1.96 x 10-12 = Tangent of AngleTQ x (T + 120.5)3 x 1.27 x 10-12 = Tangent of AngleTQ x (T + 146.0)3 x 9.34 x 10-13 = Tangent of AngleTQ x (T + 146.0)3 x 4.04 x 10-13 = Tangent of AngleTQ x (T + 171.5)3 x 3.61 x 10-13 = Tangent of AngleTQ x (T + 171.5)3 x 1.74 x 10-13 = Tangent of Angle

SGBM73, SGCM73SGDM73SGBM74, SGCM74SGDM74SGBM75, SGCM75SGDM75SGBM76, SGCM66SGDM76

METRIC UNIT

THESE CHANGES ARE NOT RELATEDTO CYLINDER DESIGN CHANGE


SGBMx3

SGCMx3

SGDMx3

SGBMx4

SGCMx4

SGDMx4

SGBMx5

SGCMx5

SGDMx5

SGBMx6

SGCMx6

SGDMx6

SLIDEMODEL

MAXIMUM LOADS

MAXIMUM STATIC ORSHOCK LOAD

MAXIMUMDYNAMIC LOAD

MAXIMUMSTATIC TORQUE

MAXIMUMDYNAMIC TORQUE

*This formula yields equivalent horizontal load value. See appropriate Load vs. Life graph on pages 5D-30 to 5D-33. T = Travel inch [m]**See appropriate TC Load vs. Life Graph for maximum loads on pages 5D-30 to 5d-33.

Nm41.4

13(T/2 + .0156)

30.9(T/2 + .0156)

269.7

36.9(T/2 + .0211)

72(T/2 + .0211)

521

79(T/2 + .0248)

154(T/2 + .0248)

754.7

170(T/2 + .0246)

294(T/2 + .0246)

in-lb366.7

4520(T/2 + .613)

10749(T/2 + .613)

2387

12868(T/2 + .830)

25087(T/2 + .830)

4611

27537(T/2 + .978)

53823(T/2 + .978)

6679

59139(T/2 + .967)

102244(T/2 + .967)

lb72

**

**

186

**

**

340

**

**

565

**

**

N1025

319.9(T/2 + .0156)

760.4(T/2 + .0156)

5560

760.4(T/2 + .0211)

1481(T/2 + .0211)

9785.6

1481(T/2 + .0248)

2903(T/2 + .0248)

12899.2

2903(T/2 + .0246)

5006(T/2 + .0246)

230

2834(T/2 + .613)

6739(T/2 + .613)

1250

6739(T/2 + .830)

13138(T/2 + .830)

2200

13138(T/2 + .978)

25679(T/2 + .978)

2900

25679(T/2 + .967)

44396(T/2 + .967)

lb N320.3

**

**

827.3

**

**

1512.3

**

**

2513.1

**

**

in-lb115

torque*1.595

torque*1.595

355

torque*1.909

torque*1.909

713

torque*2.096

torque*2.096

1301

torque*2.303

torque*2.303

Nm13

torque*.0405

torque*.0405

40.1

torque*.0485

torque*.0485

80.6

torque*.0532

torque*.0532

147

torque*.0585

torque*.0585

HORIZONTAL LOAD TORQUE LOAD

SHOCK PAD ON RETRACTIONBR CB PROXIMITY SWITCH READYBOTH ENDS

IMPERIAL[METRIC]

SGx33[SGx73]SGx34

[SGx74]SGx35

[SGx75]SGx36

[SGx76]

B1.10[28]1.10[28]1.10[28]1.10[28]

A.57

[14.5].57

[14.5].57

[14.5].57

[14.5]

C1.260[32]

1.476[37.5]1.693[43]

2.008[51]

D.354[9]

.354[9]

.315[8]

.315[8]

Numbers in [ ] are for metric units or in mm.

IMPERIAL[METRIC]

SGx33[SGx73]SGx34

[SGx74]SGx35

[SGx75]SGx36

[SGx76]

A6.693[170]7.441

[189.5]8.445

[214.5]9.449[240]

B.217[5.5].118[3]

.118[3]

.118[3]

C.354[9]

.354[9]

.354[9]

.354[9]

Numbers in [ ] are for metric units or in mm.

L6 LUBE FITTING IN SADDLE PORTPOSITION 3





VERTICAL APPLICATIONSTEP 1: Application Data

Example: SGBM33 x 8 inch travel with an 8 lb payload

(WTM) Weight = 11.75 lb (Total Moving Weight)

(V) Velocity = 3 ft/sec (Speed of Travel)

(d) Cylinder Bore Diameter = 1-1/8"

(P) Operating Pressure = 80 psig

(C) Cycles/Hour = 600 c/hr

HORIZONTAL APPLICATIONSTEP 1: Application Data

Example: SGBM35 x 18 inch travel and 22 lb payload

(WTM) Weight = 32 lb (Total Moving Weight)

(V) Velocity = 3 ft/sec (Speed of Travel)

(d) Cylinder Bore Diameter = 1-1/2"

(P) Operating Pressure = 80 psi

(C) Cycles/Hr = 800 c/hr

WM = 8.50 + (.087 x 18 in)

WM = 10.0 lb

WTM = 10.0 + 22.0

WTM = 32.0 lb



Removed -L4 Option-Refer to Catalog 2002, Page 5D-37


SADDLE MOUNTING INPOSTITION 1GY

IMPERIAL[METRIC]

SGx34[SGx74]SGx35

[SGx75]SGx36

[SGx76]

A3.956

[100.5 mm]4.488

[114 mm]5.492

[139.5 mm]

B2.658

[67.5 mm]2.795

[71 mm]2.834

[72 mm]

C1/4-20 x .50

[M6 x 1.0 x 12 mm]5/16-18 x .50

[M8 x 1.25 x 12 mm]3/8-16 x .59

[M10 x 1.25 x 15 mm]Numbers in [ ] are for metric units or in mm.


HALL EFFECT SWITCH KITS (includes mounting hardware) REED SWITCH KITS (includes mounting hardware)

25mm - 40mm (mounting hardware included)

REED WIRING SCHEMATICS

PNP MODELSMODEL 72304-01, 72304-02, 72304-03

HALL WIRING SCHEMATICS

BROWN

BLUE DC

DC

BLACK LOAD1

4

3

BROWN

BLUE DC

DC

BLACK LOAD1

4

3

NPN MODELSMODEL 72304-04, 72304-05,72304-06

MODEL 72304-07, 72304-08,72304-09

BROWN

LED

NORMALLY OPEN

WHITE

DESCRIPTIONHall PNP (with LED) 5m cableHall NPN (with LED) 5m cableHall PNP (with LED) 5m cableHall NPN (with LED) 5m cableHall PNP (with LED) 5m cableHall NPN (with LED) 5m cable

PART NO.72304-0172304-0472304-0272304-0572304-0372304-06

DESCRIPTIONReed (with LED) 5m cableReed (with LED) 5m cableReed (with LED) 5m cable

CYLINDER BORESIZE253240

PART NO.72304-0772304-0872304-09

RM

SPECIFICATIONS 72304-07 THROUGH 72304-09OPERATING PRINCIPLE Magnetic ReedSWITCH CONFIGURATION Normally OpenMAXIMUM CONTACT RATING 35 WattsMAXIMUM VOLTAGE 250 Volts AC/DCMAXIMUM STARTING CURRENT 1.5 AmpsHYSTERESIS Approximately .8 mmOPERATING TEMP. -20° to 175°FENVIRONMENTAL IP65HOUSING MATERIAL Anodized Aluminum

BORE SIZE253240

RD1.0631.3381.535

RC.9841.2201.417

RB.374.374.374

SPECIFICATIONS 72304-01 THROUGH 72304-06OPERATING PRINCIPLE Hall EffectSWITCH CONFIGURATION Normally OpenOUTPUT TYPE PNP/NPNMAXIMUM CONTINUOUS CURRENT 200mAMAXIMUM VOLTAGE 10-30 Volt VDCSWITCH INDICATOR LEDMAXIMUM CLOSING FREQUENCY Approximately 1kHzMAXIMUM STARTING CURRENT 1.5 AmpsHYSTERESIS Approximately .8mmOPERATING TEMP. -20° to 175°FENVIRONMENTAL IP67HOUSING MATERIAL Anodized AluminumCONNECTION CABLE 3 x .25mm2

RM1.1811.1811.181

RD

RB

RC

CYLINDER BORESIZE

25

32

40







REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 3-15-02 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SHP

None


Revised SHP Slide Selection DataThis bulletin addresses two catalog page changes to the Series SHP Slides. A dimensional change to theextend travel adjustment on size 08 is corrected in the following graph, found on page 5A-6 of Catalog 2002.In addition, PHD has enhanced the methodology to determine maximum payload capacity in the slideselection data on page 5A-7. All changes and additions are shaded.

Refer to Catalog 2002,Page 5A-6.

Refer to Catalog 2002, Page 5A-7

SIZE

08

12

16

NOMINAL TRAVEL

in mm0.791.570.791.570.591.382.17

20402040153555

EXTEND TRAVELADJUSTMENT

RETRACT TRAVELADJUSTMENT

ADJUSTMENT MIN.SHANK LENGTH

SCREWDRIVER MAX.SHANK DIAMETER

in mm.197.197.394.394.394.394.394

55

1010101010

in mm in mm1.52.31.11.21.31.32.2

38582830333355

in mm.083.083.130.130.130.130.130

2.12.13.33.33.33.33.3

.197

.197

.394

.394

.394

.394

.394

55

1010101010

SLIDE SELECTIONThere are three major factors to consider whenselecting a slide: thrust capacity, allowable mass,and dynamic moment capacity.

1 THRUST CAPACITYUse the theoretical output table todetermine if thrust is sufficient for theapplied load.

MAXIMUM PAYLOAD CAPACITYAll Series SHP Slides come standard withend of travel shock pads. However, theseshock pads are limited in the amount ofenergy that they can dissipate. Therefore,the slides have a maximum payload limit.Use the allowable velocity graph to verifythat the slide can carry the payload at thedesired velocity.

SIZE

08

12

16

DIRECTION

RETRACT

EXTEND

RETRACT

EXTEND

RETRACT

EXTEND

THEORETICAL OUTPUT TABLE lb [N]

20 psi[1.4 bar]

1.2[5.3]1.6

[7.1]2.7

[12.0]3.5

[15.6]5.4

[24.0]6.3

[28.0]

OPERATING PRESSURE30 psi

[2.1 bar]1.8

[8.0]2.4

[10.7]4.0

[17.8]5.3

[23.6]8.1

[36.0]9.4

[41.8]

40 psi[2.8 bar]

2.4[10.7]

3.1[13.8]

5.3[23.6]

7.1[31.6]10.8

[48.0]12.5

[55.6]

50 psi[3.4 bar]

3.0[13.3]

3.9[17.3]

6.7[29.8]

8.8[39.1]13.5

[60.0]15.7

[69.8]

60 psi[4.1 bar]

3.6[16.0]

4.7[20.9]

8.0[35.6]10.6

[47.1]16.2

[72.0]18.8

[83.6]

70 psi[4.8 bar]

4.2[18.7]

5.5[24.4]

9.3[41.3]12.4

[55.1]18.9

[84.0]22.0

[97.8]

80 psi[5.5 bar]

4.8[21.3]

6.3[28.0]10.7

[47.6]14.1

[62.7]21.6

[96.0]25.1

[111.6]

90 psi[6.2 bar]

5.4[24.0]

7.1[31.6]12.0

[53.3]15.9

[70.7]24.3

[108.0]28.2

[125.3]

100 psi[6.9 bar]

6.0[26.7]

7.9[35.1]13.3

[59.1]17.6

[78.2]27.0

[120.0]31.4

[139.6]

UNITSHP08x20SHP08x40SHP12x20SHP12x40SHP 16x15SHP16x35SHP16x55

TRAVEL TIME0.1

0.180.180.220.150.2

0.25NOTES:1) Travel time is in secondsfrom application of pressure.2) Travel times relativelyindependent of pressurebetween 60 and 100 psi.

ALLOWABLE LOAD VS. VELOCITY3.5

3

2.5

2

1.5

1

0.5

0

LOAD

lb

[N]

VELOCITY IPS [mm/sec]

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21

SHP08

SHP12

SHP16

[15.6]

[13.3]

[11.1]

[8.9]

[6.7]

[4.4]

[2.2]

[25] [76] [127] [178] [229] [279] [330] [381] [432] [483] [533]

3

2

DYNAMIC MOMENT CAPACITYThe Dynamic Moment Load …


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 11-1-02 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDESPAGE 1 OF 3 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SG

Notify existing customers of this design change.


Design Change To Series SG Slides

PHD is in the process of phasing in certain sizes of our new design Series SG Slide based on inventory usage. Presently, PHD isconverting new orders of the size 4 to the new design. It is anticipated all sizes will be converted within the next 3-5 weeks. Although theredesign provides for a drop-in replacement for existing slides, there are some issues that require review and qualification with existingcustomers who will be replacing their current design Series SG in the future. See the IMPORTANT NOTES section.

ORDERING DATA: SERIES SG

TO ORDER SPECIFY:Product, Series, Type, Design No.,Size, Travel, and Options.

NOTES:1) All units are shock ready as standard. Shock absorber kits

are ordered separately. See page 5D-25 for completeordering information.

2) Shock absorber on retraction is not available with UB2xoption (port position 2).

3) Shock absorbers are not plated with -Z1 option.4) Options -BB and -BR are not available with

shock absorbers.

SIZE1

2

3

4

5

6

- 19 mm bore cylinder with8 mm shaft standard,10 mm shaft oversize





- 40 mm bore cylinder with25 mm shaft standard,30 mm shaft oversizeS - Slide

DBDEDRH4EMU6U7


DBDEDRH4H47L9EM

PBPEPRUBxx

WITH CYLINDER OPTIONS- Cushion controls both direction (Standard in location 1 & 5)- Cushion control extend only (Standard in location 1)- Cushion control retract only (Standard in location 5)- Cylinder replacement only- Rodlok cylinder with locking device adaptor (Not available on size 1)- NPT ports (NPT-standard on imperial units BSPP-standard on metric units)- Hall Effect magnetic piston (Available on size 1 only)- Magnetic piston for use with PHD Miniature Reed and Magnetoresistive Switches (Magnetoresistive switches not available on size 1)- Port controls both directions (Standard locations are 1 & 5, not available on size 1)- Port control extend only (Standard in location 1, not available on size 1)- Port control retract only (Standard in location 5, not available on size 1) - Optional port locations

Standard ports, cushion controls, and port controls are located in positions 1 & 5.Sizes 2 and 3 use 10-32 [M5] ports when combined with port controls on thesame surface.

SHOCK ABSORBER KITSPHD SHOCK

ABSORBER NO.57858-07-x57858-01-x57858-02-x

SLIDEMODEL

SGxx1, SGxx2SGxx3

SGxx4, SGxx5, SGxx6

x – –

26

- Imperial- Metric

x

E - 3 position cylinder(specify only if needed)

THREE POSITION UNIT

MID-POSITION TRAVELSpecify for 3 position units.

Travel from retract position 1to mid-position 2.

B

CD

- Standard linear ball bushing,standard shaft

- TC bushing, standard shaft- TC bushing, oversize shaft

DESIGN NO.

GS B 2 3 6 DB – M – PB

SERIESG - Gantry

BB – Q1 – Z1

SLIDE OPTIONS- Shock Pad both directions- Shock Pad on extension- Shock Pad on retraction- Proximity Switch ready both ends*- Saddle mounting in position number 4- Saddle mounting in position number 1

(Not available on sizes 1, 2, 3 slides)- Lube fitting in saddle port position 2 and 4- Lube fitting in saddle port position 3- Corrosion-resistant guide shafts (ends unplated)- Electroless nickel plated ferrous metal parts

*Switches must be ordered separately.

BBBEBRCBGXGY

L4L6Q1Z1

Available in 1/4" increments.Total slide travel fromretract position 1 toextend position 3.

SLIDE TRAVELIMPERIAL UNITS

21 - 1" to 12"22 - 1" to 12"23 - 1" to 16"24 - 1" to 20"25 - 1" to 24"26 - 1" to 36"

SLIDESIZE

SLIDE TRAVELMETRIC UNITS

61 - 25 mm to 305 mm62 - 25 mm to 305 mm63 - 25 mm to 405 mm64 - 25 mm to 510 mm65 - 25 mm to 610 mm66 - 25 mm to 915 mm

Available in 5 mm increments.Total slide travel fromretract position 1 toextend position 3.

SLIDESIZE

DESCRIPTIONDC Inductive Proximity Switch8 mm Threaded Current Sinking (NPN)DC Inductive Proximity Switch8 mm Threaded Current Sourcing (PNP)

MODEL NUMBER

51422-005-02

51422-006-02

INDUCTIVE PROXIMITY SWITCHES

E 3

- VDMA/ISO cylinder ready32 and 40 mm bore

- ISO 6432 cylinder ready16, 20, and 25 mm bore

H11

H12

WITHOUT CYLINDER OPTIONS

-H11 and -H12 are available on designnumber 6 metric units only.

TYPE

PRODUCT





DESIGN IMPROVEMENTS

■ Powered by PHD’s full featured ISO compliant SeriesCV Cylinder, the CV provides exceptionally long life,high speed, and superb stopping capacity. Additionally,the cylinder allows selection of performance enhancingoptions including Hushcontrol®, Rodlock®, and 3position units.

■ The Series CV Cylinder uses the robust Series 6250 Reed and SolidState switches which mount into the cylinder’s integral slots. Tierodmounted switch brackets are no longer needed providing cost andspace savings.

■ Locking screws that secure the travel adjustments have been enhanced by using a non-marring urethane pad and stainless steel locking screw. Enhancement provides easier adjustmentand securely locks the adjustment system.

IMPORTANT NOTES

■ The mounting pattern and location has not changed allowing drop in and bolt up to the old design. However, the CV cylinder isslightly longer in length and customer awareness of this is needed especially for replacement situations. (See enclosed chart.)

■ With the exception of the size 5, the bore size, piston area is smaller than the old design unit creating a slight reduction in thrustcapacity. (See enclosed chart.) In a minority of replacement situations, this could be an issue if the slide was originally sized onthe “borderline.” Customer awareness is suggested for replacement applications.

■ If a customer is purchasing a new design unit for a replacement of an existing Series SG which used the 1750 switches, thecustomer will need to order the 6250 switches to replace their existing switches. Contact PHD Customer Service for assistance asrequired.





EFFECTIVE PISTON AREA in2 [mm2]BORE EXTEND RETRACT B DIM FF DIM

UNIT OLD NEW OLD NEW OLD NEW OLD NEW OLD NEWSGx22 1.000 .787 .785 .49 .675 .41 3.661 3.366 5.691 6.870

[SGx62] [25.4] [20] [506] [314] [435] [264] [93] [85.5] [145.5] [174.5]SGx23 1.125 .984 .994 .76 .885 .64 2.696 3.720 4.78 7.343

[SGx63] [28.6] [25] [642] [491] [572] [412] [68.5] [94.5] [122] [186.5]SGx 24 1.125 1.260 1.767 1.25 1.46 1.07 4.488 4.843 7.582 9.213[SGx64] [38.1] [32] [1140] [804] [944] [691] [114] [123] [193.5] [254]SGx25 1.500 1.575 1.767 1.95 1.46 1.64 4.488 5.217 7.582 10.00

[SGx65] [38.1] [40] [1140] [1257] [944] [1056] [114] [132.5] [193.5] [254]SGx26 2.000 1.575 3.142 1.95 2.84 1.64 4.469 5.217 7.417 10.000

[SGx66] [50.8] [40] [2027] [1257] [1830] [1056] [113.5] [132.5] [186] [254]

B* + TRAVEL

CL

3 POSITION DETAILFF* + SLIDE TOTAL

TRAVEL +MID-POSITION

TRAVEL


REQUIRED ACTION:

TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL35 DATE: 2-27-06 PRODUCT TYPE: Slides PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SM Slides


Keep a copy of this bulletin in the Series SM Slide section of your CAT06, between pages 2-98 and 2-99. If your customers are interested in SM Slides, make them aware of this page.

Series SM Slides - Accessories Page Missing from CAT06The last page of the accessories was unintentionally removed from CAT06. This page contained data for the modular kits to attach Series STP Slides directly to Series SM Slides and the 8 mm Proximity Bracket & Target Kits. See the information below.

UNITSIZE0812162532

Ain

.827

.866

.748

.748

.630

mm2122191916

in.354.433.472.669.787

mm911121720

B

PART NO.

51422-005-02

51422-006-02

DESCRIPTION8 mm Inductive Proximity SwitchNPN with 2 meter Cable8 mm Inductive Proximity SwitchPNP with 2 meter Cable

See Switches and Sensors section for switch details.

TARGETBRACKET

8mm PROXIMITY SWITCHNOT INCLUDED IN KIT

.709[18]

B

A

MODULAR MOUNTING KITSModular design of the Series SM slide body allows Series

STP Rail Slides to bolt and dowel together without the need for a transition plate. See chart for slide compatibility and hardware kits required. Each kit contains 2 dowel pins and 4 SHCS to mount the units together. PHD recommends that a -J3 option (transitional fi t) be specifi ed with the slide ordering data to allow the units to dowel together properly. Both units have -J3 dowel hole option as shown.

PROXIMITY SWITCH BRACKET & TARGET KITEach kit contains a bracket, target and hardware for mounting

one 8 mm threaded proximity switch on a Series SMx Slide. Switches must be ordered separately. See Switches and Sensors section for detailed switch information.

(KIT #71032)

SECONDARYSTPDx08STPDx12STPDx16STPDx25STPDx32

KIT NUMBERSIMPERIAL

71033713877104371053

PRIMARYSMxx08SMxx12SMxx16SMxx25SMxx32

METRIC71034713887104471054

CONSULT PHD

NOTE: CARRIAGE OF SERIES STP SLIDEMUST BE MOVED FORWARD TO ACCESSREAR MOUNTING HOLES IN SLIDE BODY

2X DOWEL PINS

4X SHCS

SERIES SM SLIDES

SERIES STP SLIDES


TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL36 DATE: 5-4-10 PRODUCT TYPE: SLideS

MODEL OR SERIES: C, T, R, and B


PAGE 1 OF 1

ReQUiRed ACTiON:Please contact PHD Customer Service for additional assistance if required.

Shock Absorber Availability on Classic Slides

Effective 6/1/2010, PHD will no longer provide shock absorbers as part of the optional shock absorber kits for the following series of PHD Classic Slides:

• Series C • Series T • Series R • Series B

PHD will continue to offer the kits less the shock which typically includes the shock mounting bracket and hardware. Following is a specification chart to allow you to obtain the appropriate shock absorber for your customers.

PHD Product

PHD Kit Number (Shock NOT Included)

PHD Kit Number (Shock

Included)PHD Shock

NumberShock

MfgShock Mfg Part

Number

PHD Button Part

NumberButton

Mfg

Mfg Button Part

NumberBS03 13785 13789 11036-003 Ace MC225 NA NA NABS04 12345 12360 11036-005 Ace MC600 NA NA NABS06 12356 12362 11036-005 Ace MC600 NA NA NABS08 12356 12362 11036-005 Ace MC600 NA NA NABS10 13799 13800 11036-002 Ace MA3350 NA NA NABS12 13801 13802 11036-010 Ace A-3/4 x 2 NA NA NACB03 NA NA 11036-012 Ace MC75 or MC75-3 NA NA NACB04 NA 16913-002 11036-003 Ace MC225 16282-002 Ace 250-0267CB06 NA 16913-003 11036-005 Ace MC600 16282-003 Ace 250-0268RS03 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NARS04 11037, 12203 NA 11036-001 Ace MA600 NA NA NARS06 11038, 12204 NA 11036-001 Ace MA600 NA NA NARS08 11155, 11156 NA 11036-005 Ace MC600 NA NA NARS10 11159, 11160 NA 11036-005 Ace MC600 NA NA NARS12 11163, 11163 NA 11036-002 Ace MA3350 NA NA NATS08 19581, 19580 19578, 19579 11036-002 Ace MA3350 NA NA NA

NA= Not Applicable

FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER

REQUIRED ACTION:

TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G1

DATE: 4-3-91 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 8400 ANGULAR

All 8400 Series Angular Grippers now have a non-adjustable piston rod. This change started toappear in January of '90 and as of September '90, all units are being shipped with this revision. Priorto this change the customer could use the set screw in the end of the piston rod to adjust the jawposition of the gripper. All design "02" grippers contain this new piston rod and are no longer adjust-able. This design change was instituted to eliminate rod breakage and improve the gripper quality.The new part numbers read: 8420-02-xxx, 8410-02-xxx, 8420-02-xxx.

The "01" design is available for any customer who requires the adjustability.

All customers using Series 8400 Angular Grippers should made aware of this change. Unless aspecific request is made, all orders will continue to be shipped as an "02" design with non-adjustablegripper jaws. (Consult PHD for part number.)

Key number 3, piston and rod as-sembly, has been redesigned and isnot to be used for adjusting the jawposition.



REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 4-3-91 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 8460 PARALLEL

If you had any customers who complained about this problem you should make them aware of thesolution.

The mounting screws which attach the Hall Sensor to an 8460-01-301 Gripper have been changed.The button head cap screw was found to protrude past the bottom mounting surface. We have nowchanged to a standard socket head cap screw which has a smaller head, and have eliminated themounting interference. This change took effect in December of 1990 and all stock was retrofittedwith the new fasteners.

NEW FASTENER

BOTTOMMOUNTING SURFACE




DATE: 7-17-91 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 8460, 8470, 8480

Jaw pads should be in line and parallel, PHD holds tight tolerances on all associated parts in order tomaintain a quality gripper, however, they are not perfect. The chart below shows how the jaw pad oneach model may vary from being perfectly in line and parallel to each other.

Angle: The angle each jaw pad may vary, positive or negative, off parallel with the rear mountingsurface.

Offset: Distance one jaw pad may vary from the other jaw pad.

Angle Offset(Degrees) (Inches)

8460 2.0 .0228470 1.3 .0228480 1.0 .022


REQUIRED ACTION:Customers purchasing standard grippers should be advised of these specifications so appropriatetooling can be designed.

PHD will produce special grippers with less deviation by machining the jaw pad mounting surfacesafter assembly.

AngleOffset Difference

Rear Mounting Surface


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 1-15-92 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERSPAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL SERIES 7900

Inform your Gripper customers of the availability of the low cost 1750 Switches on Series 7900Grippers.


Compact Switches for Series 7900 GrippersSeries 7900 Angular and Parallel Grippers can now be outfitted with PHD 1750 Compact ProximitySwitches. The mounting kits shown in the table below are included in the magnetic option on pagetwo of this bulletin. The switch mounting kits may be ordered separately to retro-fit Grippers in thefield. These new kits and magnetic option will be available by February 15, 1992.

GRIPPER MODEL SWITCH

MOUNTING KIT

792x, 7960 English 13592

793x, 7970 English 13593

794x, 7980 English 13594

795x, 7990 English 13595

792x, 7962 Metric 13586

793x, 7972 Metric 13583

794x, 7982 Metric 13584

795x, 7992 Metric 13585

See page two of this bulletin for theproper magnet/bracket option on Series7900 Grippers.



DATE: 1-15-92 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERSPAGE 2 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL SERIES 7900


Compact Switches for Series 7900 Grippers

To order the proper bracket for 1750 Switches, specify either -5 or -6 in the designated location in the productnomenclature. Switches must be ordered separately.

XXXX XX 5 X

DESIGN NO.

X

MODEL OPTIONS

- Reed Magnet and Switch Bracket Kit for 1750 Reed Switches- Hall Magnet and Switch Bracket Kit for 1750 Hall Effect Switches

XXXX-5

-6

- - X

PORT TYPE SEALS

OPTION


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 7-6-92 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES 190 PARALLEL

Make sure your miniature gripper customers are aware of this convenient item.


Hard To Find Jaw Screws Now Available

1906x-1-x002 Gripper

3-56 JawTooling Screws(Socket Head)

PHD's smallest Series 190 Parallel Grippers (1906x-1-x002) contain 3-56 tapped holes in the jaws.The socket head cap screws for attachment of jaw tooling can be difficult to find. For this reasonPHD is now offering these alloy steel screws as an accessory item to the 190 Gripper. Listed beloware available screws with prices.

Part Screw List PriceNo. Size Each

2809-651 3-56 x 1/4 $1.00

2809-652 3-56 x 3/8 $1.00

2809-653 3-56 x 1/2 $1.00


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 7-6-92 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 7950, 7951, 7954, 7990

None required.


7950, 7951, 7954 and 7990 Now Pneumatic OnlyAll PHD 3" Bore Grippers (listed above) are now limited to pneumatic service only, with a maximumpressure rating of 150 psi air. These grippers were previously rated for up to 750 psi hydraulic. Itwas found that the gripper body was not thick enough in the switch groove to support hydraulicpressures. Usage of these large grippers is fairly low and even fewer are used for hydraulics.

Units without switch cavities are available through our custom products area.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 1-15-93 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES 190 PARALLEL

Inform your customers of this corrected catalog dimension.


Revised 190 Parallel Gripper Jaw DimensionShown below are revised dimensions for Series 190 parallel gripper jaws. The “F” dimension wasshown wrong in Catalog 91 for the three smaller sizes. Catalog 91A shows the two smaller sizescorrect but the 19081 and 19082 models are shown at .500 instead of the correct “F” dimension of.375. This is an important dimension and should be corrected in any and all outstanding catalogs.

MODEL NO.LETTER 19061 19071 19081 19091

DIM 19062 19072 19082 19092A MIN 1.024 1.299 1.811 2.323A MAX 1.181 1.575 2.205 2.835

AL MIN✴ 1.417 1.772 2.323 2.835AL MAX✴ 1.732 2.205 2.953 3.701

B .781 1.025 1.500 1.968C .394 .551 .787 1.023D .3937 .4921 .7480 .9842F .188 .250 .375 .625G 3-56 X .18 DP 6-32 X .28 DP 8-32 X .32 DP 10-24 X .38 DPH 1.012 1.290 1.635 2.081K .159 .205 .213 .255L .098 .138 .197 .256M .553 .697 .961 1.239

O✴✴ .5310 .6875 .8430 1.0940P✴✴ .550 .710 1.100 1.535

Q 4-40 X .18 DP 6-32 X .22 DP 8-32 X .28 DP 10-24 X .38 DPR .600 .680 .785 .870S .835 1.074 1.400 1.786T .350 .368 .380 .322W 3/32 1/8 1/8 3/16Y .1968 .2756 .3940 .5118Z #4 #6 #8 #10

AA .103 .121 .186 .180BB 10-32 10-32 10-32 10-32CC .166 .176 .192 .153DD .465 .505 .593 .750

REVISED DIMENSIONS

JAW KEY DETAIL

FM

CBSQ

FILE UNDER GRIPPER IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER


DATE: 3-1-94 PRODUCT TYPE: GRB GRIPPERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: GRB 21 & GRB 31


PHD Switches Not Available on Two Smallest SizesModels GRBx21 and GRBx31 180° Angular Grippers are NOT available with PHD Model 5360Switches (Sensor option -2). PHD Catalog 93 is not clear regarding switch availability on these 180°Angular Grippers. The 5360 Switches ARE available on the four larger sizes of the GRB Gripperline. Four mm round switches are available on all sizes of the GRB Gripper.

PROXIMITY SWITCHES4 mm Round Current Sinking (NPN)4 mm Round Current Sourcing (PNP)

18430-001-0218430-002-02

TO ORDER SPECIFY:Product type, Series, Design Designation, Size, Jaw Variation, Design No., Sensor, Port Location, Jaw Rotation, and Seals.

GR B

SERIES

--1 2 1

PRODUCT TYPEGR - Gripper

1

PORT POSITIONS ANDFLOW CONTROLS

B - 180°

SIZE

2 - .375 Bore3 - .500 Bore4 - .750 Bore5 - 1.125 Bore6 - 1.500 Bore7 - 2.000 Bore DESIGN NO.

5 4 10

SEALS1 - Buna-N

NOTE:Flow Controls are only available with ports in Position #4on models GRBx41-GRBx71.

GRBx21GRBx31GRBx41GRBx51GRBx61GRBx71

180741809018075180911809118091

GRIPPERNO.

KITNO.

PROXIMITY SWITCHMOUNTING KITS

Proximity Ready option must be specified for use with Proximity

Switch Mounting Kits.

Port Position 1,Without Port Controls®

(Standard) Port Position 4,Without Flow ControlsPort Position 4, with FlowControls (Port Controls®)(Not available on sizes 2 and 3.)

1 -

4 -

9 -

DESIGN DESIGNATION1 - English2 - English, Corrosion Resistant

JAW VARIATION1 - Non-Locking

SENSOR0 - None2 - Hall Effect Magnet on piston (For Series 5360 Switches) Not available on GRBx21 & GRBx315 - Proximity Ready

JAW ROTATIONPER JAW

0 - 90°, Standard1 - 75°2 - 60°3 - 45°4 - 30°5 - 15°

REQUIRED ACTION: None required.

On August 15, 1995 PHD started phasing in a revision to the English models of the Series 190Miniature Parallel Gripper. This revision involves changing over some internal components andexternal fasteners to a metric specification. This change is being made as part of an overall costreduction with new pricing that is effective September 15, 1995.

This design number change has no effect on the form, fit, or function of the Series 190 Grippers.Design 2 units will completely interchange with Design 1 units. PHD will publish a complete productrelease with catalog's pricing and parts list in September, 1995.

There are two types of accessory kits that are affected by the 190 Gripper Design change. NewProximity Switch Bracket and Target Kits, and Jaw Travel Adjustment Kits have metric fasteners tomatch the threads in the revised gripper body.

As parts for Design 1 are depleted, PHD will automatically convert orders for grippers and theaffected accessory kits to the new design and kit numbers.

Page 2 of this Technical Data Bulliten contains new ordering data and new accessory kit numbers.


REQUIRED ACTION:None Required. PHD will automatically convert orders to the new units and kits. You may want to letyour customers know, to minimize questions and confusion.


DESIGN NUMBER CHANGE ON 190 MINIATURE PARALLEL GRIPPERS


DATE: 9-1-95 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERSPAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: 190 MINIATURE PARALLEL

GRIPPERS

FILE UNDER GRIPPERS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDERPHD, Inc. • 9009 Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN 46899 U.S.A. • Phone (219) 747-6151 • Fax (219) 747-6754

DESIGN NUMBER CHANGE ON 190 MINIATURE PARALLEL GRIPPERS


DATE: 9-1-95 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERSPAGE 2 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: 190 MINIATURE PARALLEL

GRIPPERS

JAW TRAVEL ADJUSTMENTKIT

OLD NUMBER NEW NUMBER 18655 18433 18656 18434 18657 18435 18658 18436

TO ORDER SPECIFY:Model, Design No., Proximity Ready Options, MaximumForce, Spring Option, and Seals.

See complete Gripper Product Guide for all available optionsand accessories.

19071 2

DESIGN NO.

- - 0 5 1

SPRING OPTIONS0 - None1 - Single Acting Close2 - Single Acting Open

MAXIMUM FORCE

MODELSJAW STYLE 1

19060190701908019080

JAW STYLE 2SHORT TRAVEL

19061190711908119091

LONG TRAVEL19062190721908219092

1

0 - Internal Grip5 - External Grip

PROXIMITY SWITCHREADY OPTION

4 - Sensor Ready (Not available with Spring Option)5 - Proximity Switch Ready

SEALS

1 - Buna-N

PHD 5580 SWITCH BRACKETAND TARGET KIT

OLD NUMBER NEW NUMBER 55015 - 1 59794 - 1 55016 - 1 59795 - 1 55017 55772 55018 55773

PROXIMITY SWITCH BRACKETAND TARGET SWITCH

OLD NUMBER NEW NUMBER18873 - 1 59792 - 118875 - 1 59793 - 1 18876 18438 18877 18439

1906X

1907X

1908X

1909X

MODEL


DATE: 5-5-97 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 190/191 MINIATURE

PARALLEL GRIPPERS


REQUIRED ACTION:Make note of this change to be able to inform your customers who may order this option in the future.


Spring Option EliminatedAs stated in the Product Notification faxed on 3/4/97, premature spring failure has occurred in certainapplications on the Series 190/191 size 6 gripper. PHD has aggressively tested for solutions to thissituation in the interim. This research and testing has not produced a satisfactory outcome to whereperformance and life expectancy meets PHD standards. As a result, PHD has made the decision toeliminate the single acting and spring assist option on the 19x6x gripper effective May 2nd. Againthis affects only the size 6 (smallest) gripper. PHD recommends that all customers consider the size7 (19x7x) if the spring option is required.

PHD Customer Service will be contacting distributors pertaining to any orders for this grippercurrently in house. Additionally, future reprints of the catalog will reflect this change.

** JAW MOVEMENT NOTE:JAWS “OPEN” AND “CLOSE” DIMENSIONS REFLECT THEMINIMUM DIMENSIONS AT EITHER OPEN OR CLOSEDPOSITIONS. GRIPPER JAWS MAY OPEN .040 [1 mm]WIDER OR CLOSE .040 [1 mm] FURTHER THAN THESTATED DIMENSIONS.

GRDx31MODEL NO.

GRDx41 GRDx5x GRDx6xLETTERDIM.

A1 close**A1 open**A2 close**A2 open**

BCD

E*

G1 G2* G3*G4G5G6G7

H1H2

J1 J2*

in1.3681.515

——

1.1411.0631.922.866 x

.079 DP.551.2756.49211.664.121.250

6-32 x.280 DP

.8464-40 x

.220 DP.886.8465

mm34.7538.5——

29.027.048.75

22.0 x 2.0DP

14.07.012.542.253.06.5

M3 x 0.5 x6.0 DP21.5

M3 x 0.5x 6.0 DP

22.521.50

in1.8512.145

——

1.4571.3781.909

1.104 x.079 DP

.551.2756.49211.651.121.250

6-32 x.280 DP1.1028-32 x

.330 DP.906

1.1024

mm47.054.5——

37.035.048.5

28.0 x2.0 DP14.07.012.542.03.06.5

M3 x 0.5x 6.0 DP

28.0M4 x 0.7x 8.0 DP

23.028.00

in1.8702.1452.4122.8741.6541.5752.303

1.341 x.082 DP

.787.3940.7482.006.186.375

8-32 x.320 DP1.220

10-24 x.375 DP1.2011.2205

mm47.554.561.2573.042.040.058.5

34.0 x2.0 DP20.010.019.051.04.510.0

M4 x 0.7x 8.0 DP

31.0M5 x 0.8x 10.0 DP

30.531.00

in2.3922.7752.9333.5922.1261.9692.972

1.656 x.087 DP1.024.5118.98422.616.180.625

10-24 x.380 DP1.535

1/4-20 x.500 DP1.6141.5354

mm60.7570.574.591.2554.050.075.5

42.0 x2.25 DP

26.013.025.066.56.512.0

M5 x 0.8 x10.0 DP

39.0M6 x 1.0x 12.0 DP

41.039.0

NOTES:1) NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE mm2) *TOLERANCE FOR DIMENSIONS: E = ± .005 [± 0.13]

G2 = ± .0006 [± 0.015] G3 = ± .0003 [± 0.007] J2 (BETWEEN DOWEL PIN HOLES) = ± .0008 [± 0.02]J6 = ± .0005 [H7] J7 AND J8 = ± .0008 [± 0.02]

3) CIRCLED NUMBERS INDICATE SURFACE POSITIONS


DATE: 7-14-97 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: GRD PARALLEL GRIPPERS




Series GRD Jaw Dimensions

Following are dimensional changesand method of calling out jawopening and closing concerningSeries GRD Grippers. Dimensionsand notations highlighted (shaded)indicate revised data. Thesechanges affect dimensional chartson pages 4, 5, 11, 12, 13, and 14of Catalog GRD01.


DATE: 7-14-97 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 190/191 PARALLEL GRIPPERS




Series 190/191 Jaw DimensionsFollowing are dimensional changes and method of calling out jaw opening and closing concerningSeries 190/191 Grippers. Dimensions and notations highlighted (shaded) indicate revised data.These changes affect dimensional charts on pages 6-40, 6-41, 6-42, and 6-43 of Catalog 96.

NOTES:1) *AL CLOSE & OPEN ARE FOR MODELS 19x62, 72, 82, 92, 67, 77, 87, & 972) **TOLERANCE BETWEEN DOWEL PIN HOLES IS ± .0008 [±0.02]3) NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm

JAWS OPEN AND CLOSE DIMENSIONS REFLECT THE MINIMUMDIMENSIONS AT BOTH OPEN AND CLOSED POSITIONS. GRIPPERJAWS MAY OPEN OR CLOSE .080 [2 mm] FURTHER THANSTATED DIMENSIONS.

NOTES:1) *TOLERANCE BETWEEN DOWEL PIN HOLES IS ± .0008 [± 0.02]2) NUMBERS IN [ ] ARE FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN mm

JAWS OPEN AND CLOSE DIMENSIONS REFLECT THE MINIMUMDIMENSIONS AT BOTH OPEN AND CLOSED POSITIONS. GRIPPERJAWS MAY OPEN OR CLOSE .080 [2 mm] FURTHER THANSTATED DIMENSIONS.

19x60 19x70 19x80 19x90in mm in mm in mm in mm

19x65 19x75 19x85 19x95

A CLOSEA OPEN

BCDFGHKLMO*P*Q

R

.315

.403

.787

.398

.177

.312#4

1.0121.563.0981.031.5310.550

4-40 x.19 DP.601

.345

.5401.024.555.215.375#5

1.2891.937.1381.249.6875.710

6-32 x.22 DP.681

.581

.9151.496.791.256.500#8

1.6352.500.1961.624.84301.1008-32 x.28 DP.785

.7001.1501.9681.027.394.625#10

2.0813.242.256

2.1081.09401.535

10-24 x.38 DP.870

7.7510.2520.010.04.58.0

M2.525.539.52.5

26.0114.014.0

M3 x 0.5 x4.5 DP15.5

8.7513.7526.014.05.510.0M332.048.53.531.018.018.0

M3 x 0.5 x4.5 DP18.0

14.7523.2538.020.06.512.0M441.063.55.041.022.028.0

M4 x 0.7 x6.0 DP20.5

17.7529.2550.026.010.016.0M553.082.56.5

53.528.039.0

M5 x 0.8 x7.5 DP22.0

LETTERDIM.

MODEL NUMBER

A CLOSEA OPEN

AL CLOSE*AL OPEN*

BCDFG

HKLM

O**P**

1.0541.1511.4471.702.787.398

.3937.188

3-56 x.18 DP1.012.159.098.553

.5310.550

33.7539.2545.7555.2526.014.012.56.5

M3 x 0.5 x6.0 DP32.05.03.5

17.518.018.0

46.7555.2559.7574.2538.020.019.010.0

M4 x 0.7 x8.0 DP41.05.55.0

24.022.028.0

59.7571.2572.7593.2550.026.025.012.0

M5 x 0.8 x10.0 DP

53.06.56.531.528.039.0

26.7529.2536.7543.2520.010.010.05.0

M2.5 x 0.45x 5.0 DP

25.54.02.5

14.014.014.0

1.3291.5451.8022.1751.024.555

.4921.250

6-32 x.28 DP1.289.204.138.696

.6875.710

1.8412.1752.3532.9231.496.791

.7480.375

8-32 x.32 DP1.635.212.197.960

.84301.100

2.3532.8052.8653.6711.9681.027.9842.625

10-24 x.38 DP2.081.254.2561.2381.09401.535

LETTERDIM.

MODEL NUMBER19x61/62

in19x66/67

mm19x71/72

in19x76/77

mm19x81/82

in19x86/87

mm19x91/92

in19x96/97

mm


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 7-23-99 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERSPAGE 1 OF 4 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES EGP

Inform potential purchasers of Series EGP Grippers. PHD Customer Service will be qualifying ordersreceived to ensure grip force changes will not affect the customer’s application.


SERIES EGP GRIPPERS REVISED PERFORMANCE AND DIMENSIONAL DATAFollowing are revisions to catalog EGP02 performance and dimensional data regarding the SeriesEGP Grippers. Data highlighted (shaded) indicates revised information. These catalog changes willbe reflected when the Series EGP catalog is reprinted later this year.

EGP-xMx-8

0.3 in [7.6 mm]0.53 in [13.5 mm] (Jaw Style 2 only)

1.2 lb [540 g]

240 millisecond [nom]

SPECIFICATIONS EGP-xMx-7JAW TRAVEL

SHORT 0.17 in [4.4 mm]LONG 0.29 in [7.5 mm] (Jaw Style 2 only)

GRIP FORCE See chart on page 9

MOTOR VOLTAGE 24-30 VDCINTERFACE MODULE 24-30 VDC

SENSOR OPTIONS 6 mm Square Inductive or Hall Effect Proximity Switches

GRIPPER CORDSET 2 or 5 meter CableINTERFACE MODULE CABLE 1 or 3 meter Cable (ordered separately)

WEIGHT 10.56 oz [300 g]

JAW SEQUENCE TIME 170 millisecond [nom]JAW REPEATABILITY ± 0.003 in [0.08 mm]

G13 PAGE 2 OF 4



DIMENSIONS: Emax® SERIES EGP GRIPPER

A

P

HK

L

M

BB

U 3 PIN CONNECTORWITH M8 THREAD

2X THRU DIA ANDC’BORE FOR AA SOCKETHEAD CAP SCREW

SEE PROXIMITYSWITCH OPTIONPAGE FOR DETAIL.(SIZE 8 ONLY)

B SQ

DD

EE* (SIZE 7 ONLY)

FF*

CC

RE* (SIZE 7 ONLY)

F*

G

V

C

J

1X Ø THRU EACH JAWFOR W DOWEL PIN

T

N

S/2

S

2X THRU DIA EACH JAWFOR D SCREW

4X Y THREAD

LETTERDIM.

A CLOSEA OPEN

BCDE*F*GHJKLMNPRSTUVWY

AABBCCDDEE*FF*GG

in.372.546

1.024.555#5

.5250

.6875.710

1.9374.2431.6031.2894.556.138.215

1.024.375.276.710

1.2281/8

6-32 x .125 DP#6

.395

.7101.228.5250.6875.805

mm9.5

13.926.014.0M313.518.018.048.5

107.440.032.0

116.43.55.5

26.010.07.0

18.031.03.0

M3 x 0.5 x 3.2 DPM310

18.031.013.518.020.5

EGP-xMG-7x5MODEL NO.

NOTES:1) ALL METRIC DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN MILLIMETERS 1 mm = 0.03937 in2) *TOLERANCE BETWEEN DOWEL PIN HOLES = ± .0008 [± .02 mm]3) JAWS OPEN AND CLOSE DIMENSIONS REFLECT THE MINIMUM

DIMENSIONS AT BOTH OPEN AND CLOSE POSITIONS. GRIPPER JAWSMAY OPEN OR CLOSE .030 [.8 mm] FURTHER THAN STATED DIMENSIONS.

in.602.896

1.496.791#8

.8430

.84301.1002.5004.2572.0621.6354.662.197.256

1.412.500.393

1.1001.6241/8

8-32 x .25 DP#8

.3951.1001.624.8430.8430.805

mm15.322.838.020.0M422.022.028.063.0

108.052.041.0

119.05.06.5

40.012.010.028.041.04.0

M4 x 0.7 x 6.0 DPM410

28.041.022.022.020.5

EGP-xMG-8x5


4X CLEARANCE HOLE FOR W DOWEL PIN

SIZE 8 ONLY

INSTALLEDCORDSET DETAIL

GG

CORDSET EXITSGRIPPER INDIRECTION SHOWN

JAW STYLE 1

G13 PAGE 3 OF 4



DIMENSIONS: Emax® SERIES EGP GRIPPER

EE** (SIZE 7 ONLY)FF**

CC

DD

A

KL

M

BB

U 3 PIN CONNECTORWITH M8 THREAD

2X THRU DIA ANDC’BORE FOR AA SOCKETHEAD CAP SCREW


B SQ

(P)

AL

.079 [2.0]KEY EXTENSIVE

SR

NT

P ± .0003[± .008 mm]

2X D THREADEACH JAW

H

E** (SIZE 7 ONLY)

F**

G C

J

4X Y THREAD

.080 [2.0]PLUG HEIGHT

LETTERDIM.

A CLOSE*A OPEN*

AL CLOSE*AL OPEN*

BCD

E**F**GHJKLMNPRSTUWY

AABBCCDD

EE**FF**GG

in1.3581.5301.8382.1661.024.555

6-32 x .28 DP.5250.6875.710.2044.2431.0711.2894.556.138.4921.121.250

.2756 ±.0006.7101/8

6-32 x .125 DP#6

.395

.710

.204.5250.6875.805

mm34.538.946.755.026.014.0

M3 x 0.5 x 6.0 DP13.518.018.05.0

107.426.532.0116.4

3.512.53.06.5

7.0 ±0.01518.03.0

M3 x 0.5 x 3.2 DPM310

18.05.013.518.020.5

EGP-xMH-7MODEL NO.

NOTES:1) ALL METRIC DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN MILLIMETERS 1 mm = 0.03937 in2) *A = 5 mm jaw travel SIZE 7 AL = 9 mm jaw travel SIZE 7

8 mm jaw travel SIZE 8 14 mm jaw travel SIZE 83) **TOLERANCE BETWEEN DOWEL PIN HOLES = ± .0008 [±.02 mm]4) JAWS OPEN AND CLOSE DIMENSIONS REFLECT THE MINIMUM DIMENSIONS AT BOTH

OPEN AND CLOSE POSITIONS. GRIPPER JAWS MAY OPEN OR CLOSE .030 [.8 mm]FURTHER THAN STATED DIMENSIONS.

in1.8622.1602.3742.9041.496.791

8-32 x .32 DP.8430.84301.100.2124.2571.3981.6354.662.197.7480.186.375

.3940 ±.00071.1001/8

8-32 x .25 DP#8

.3951.100.212.8430.8430.805

mm47.354.960.373.838.020.0

M4 x 0.7 x 8.0 DP22.022.028.05.0

108.035.041.0119.05.019.04.510.0

10.0 ±0.02028.04.0

M4 x 0.7 x 6.0 DPM410

28.05.022.022.020.5

EGP-xMH-8

4X CLEARANCE HOLE FOR W DOWEL PIN

SEE PROXIMITYSSWITCH OPTIONPAGE FOR DETAIL.(SIZE 7 ONLY)

SIZE 8 ONLY

INSTALLEDCORDSET DETAIL

GG

CORDSET EXITSGRIPPER INDIRECTION SHOWN

JAW STYLE 2

G13 PAGE 4 OF 4


GRIP FORCE DIAGRAMS: SERIES EGP

DOUBLE ACTING

LEGENDLONG

TRAVELSHORTTRAVEL

TOOLINGLENGTH

EGP-xMx-8x5 and EGP-xMx-8x9

0 1 2 3[25] [50] [75]

30[132]

25[111]

20[89]

15[66]

10[44]

5[22]

0

EGP-xMx-7x5 and EGP-xMx-7x9

TOTA

L GR

IP F

ORCE

lbs

[N]

TOOLING LENGTH inches [mm]

25[111]

20[89]

15[66]

10[44]

5[22]

0

TOTA

L GR

IP F

ORCE

lbs

[N]


0 1 2 3 4[25] [50] [75] [100]

SHORT JAW

LONG JAW

SHORT JAW

LONG JAW

GRIP FORCE = PART WEIGHT x 3/DERATING FACTOR

The part weight that grippers can handle will vary based on:size of part being picked up, shape of part, texture of part, speed atwhich part is transferred, shape of finger pads, etc. PHDrecommends that the fingers or jaws be tooled or machined toconform to the shape of the part being gripped.

When gripping compliant (“springy”) objects or objects thatrequire alignment by the gripper fingers prior to actual gripping,expect the grip force to be reduced significantly. This is due to thedynamic nature of the internal driving mechanism. This may alsocause peak or transient gripping forces to be higher than shown inthe curves.

* Gripping forces are the arithmetic sum of all forces occurringat gripper jaws.

EXAMPLE:For the size 7 Series EGP Gripper, a weight of 2 lb needs to be

carried 2 inches from the end plate. To calculate minimum grip forcerequired, use the equation below.

GRIP FORCE = 2 x 3/0.68 = 8.8 lbTherefore, the most cost effective model available would be the

EGP-1MG-7x5 or EGP-1MH-7x5. Be certain to review notes foradditional information on grip force.

NOTES:1) The maximum tooling length for size 7 is 3 in [76 mm].

The maximum tooling length for size 8 is 4 in [102 mm].2) lb can be substituted for [N] to calculate [N].

Use the grip force charts above to determine the proper unit.


GRIP FORCE DERATING GRAPH

1.00

.80

.60

.40

.20

0

DERA

TING

FAC

TOR

0 1 2 3 4 [25] [50] [75] [100]

TOOLINGLENGTHSIZES 7 & 8

SIZE 8

Size 8 is used when larger jaw travel is required.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 6-9-00 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERSPAGE 1 OF 3 MODEL OR SERIES: GRT

Inform current and potential customers of Series GRT grippers of this update.


PART EJECTOR/SPRING ASSIST ADDED TO SERIES GRTx1Effective 7/14/00, PHD will offer Part Ejector and Spring Assist options on the new size 1 GRTGripper released in Catalog 2K (page 6A-60). The following is updated information regardingdimensional, performance, and engineering data. Data highlighted (shaded) indicates newinformation to Catalog 2K. These additions will be added to Catalog 2001.

INTERNAL PROXIMITY SWITCHESSWITCH DESCRIPTION

4 mm Round NPN (Sink)4 mm Round PNP (Source)8 mm Threaded NPN (Sink)8 mm Threaded PNP (Source)

PART NO.18430-001-0218430-002-0251422-005-0251422-006-02

GRIPPER SIZE

GRTx6, 7, & 8

GRTx1, 2, 3,4, & 5

EXTERNAL PROXIMITY SWITCHES

SWITCH DESCRIPTION8 mm Threaded NPN (Sink)8 mm Threaded PNP (Source)12 mm Threaded NPN (Sink)12 mm Threaded PNP (Source)12 mm Threaded AC 20-250 VAC

PART NO.51422-005-0251422-006-02

15561-00115561-00215561-003

GRIPPER SIZE

GRTx6, 7, & 8

GRTx1, 2, 3,4, & 5

TO ORDER, SPECIFY:Product Type, Series, Type, Style,Size, Jaw Style, Design No., Options,and Seals.

--G R T 1 4 2 1 0 0 0 1

BORE SIZE

DIRECTIONJAWS OPENINGJAWS CLOSING

GRTx2x62805-0162806-01

KIT NUMBERGRTx3x

62805-0262806-01

GRTx4x62805-0262806-02

GRTx5x62805-0262806-03

GRTx6x62805-0362806-04

GRTx7x62805-0462806-05

GRTx8x62805-0462806-05

Kit includes: 1 Proximity Target, 1 Proximity Adjustment Screw, 2 Target Adjustment Screws

GRTx1x62805-0562806-06

OPTIONS0 - None1 - Part Ejector

SPRING OPTIONS0 - None

HEAVY FORCE5 - Spring assist closed6 - Spring assist open

STYLE1 - Imperial5 - Metric

1 - 27 mm2 - 40 mm3 - 50 mm4 - 63 mm5 - 80 mm6 - 100 mm7 - 125 mm8 - 160 mm

JAW STYLE2 - Standard travel

SENSOR OPTIONS0 - None5 - Proximity switch ready

(For internal switches)

SEALS1 - Buna-N2 - Fluoro-ElastomerDESIGN NO.

TYPET - Three jaw

SERIES

PRODUCT TYPEG - Gripper

INTERNAL PROXIMITY SWITCH TARGET KITS

FINGER BLANKS

EXTERNAL PROXIMITY SWITCH MOUNTING BRACKETS


MODELNUMBERGRTx12GRTx22GRTx32GRTx42GRTx52GRTx62GRTx72GRTx82

62890-0162890-0262890-0362890-0462890-0562890-0662890-0762890-08

62890-1162890-1262890-1362890-1462890-1562890-1662890-1762890-18

GRTx2x61552-02

KIT NUMBERGRTx3x

61552-03GRTx4x

61552-04GRTx5x

61552-05GRTx6x

61552-06GRTx7x

61552-07GRTx8x

61552-08GRTx1x

61552-01

!Options may affect unit length.See unit dimension and optionspages for adders.

CUSTOM GRIPPERS ARE AVAILABLE. PLEASECONSULT PHD.

CU

STO

M PRODUCTS

F

ITTO NEED

CU

STO

M PRODUCTS

F

ITTO NEED

AIR ONLY OPENAIR ONLY CLOSED

10[45]

HEAVY SPRING ONLY

AIR WITH HEAVY SPRING CLOSED

AIR WITH HEAVY SPRING OPEN

0

TOTA

L GR

IP F

ORCE

lb [N

]

0

TOOLING LENGTH inch [mm]

GRTx1x-1-xxxx60

[267]

50[222]

20[89]

30[133]

40[178]

0.25[6]

0.5[13]

0.75[19]

1[25]

1.5[38]

1.25[32]

70[311]

GRIP FORCE GRAPH



MODELNO.

GRTx1xGRTx2xGRTx3xGRTx4xGRTx5xGRTx6xGRTx7xGRTx8x

sec..09.03.04.06.07.15.30.40

in3

0.100.300.721.413.005.6310.7521.92

cm3

1.6512234992176359

lb0.270.590.951.752.825.18.7515.5

kg0.120.270.430.801.282.323.987.05

lb441121682183785698801452

N1964997479711683253139126459

in0.2360.3150.4720.6300.7871.0241.2601.575

mm68121620263240

TOTALDIAMETRALJAW TRAVEL

TOTAL CLOSEGRIP FORCE AT87 psi [6 bar]

GRIPPERWEIGHT

CLOSE OROPEN TIME

87 psi [6 bar] DISPLACEMENT

Minimum Operating Pressure is 30 psi [2 bar] for standard unit and 60 psi [4 bar] for spring assist unit.

MODELNO.


lb9142849118193263324

N406212521852585811701441

SF

SPRING GRIP FORCE

HEAVY SPRING

lb0.070.150.230.401.101.892.375.10

kg0.030.070.100.180.500.861.082.31

WEIGHTADDER

CLOSE OR OPEN TIME87 psi [6 bar] IN sec

withspring

.08

.02

.04

.05

.08

.11

.15

.27

againstspring

.14

.05

.10

.12

.16

.21

.36

.48

springonly.14.04.10.10.12.15.24.40

lb185282110232341498591

N802313654981032151722152629

MINIMUM MAXIMUM MODELNO.


lb0.170.300.721.252.654.508.8016.00

kg0.080.140.330.571.202.054.007.27

in1.51.972.562.953.944.925.917.87

mm40506575100125150200

TOOLINGLENGTH

MAXIMUM

TOOLINGWEIGHT

MAX. PER JAW

SPECIFICATIONS


Refer to Catalog 2000 6A-64


DIMENSIONS

LETTERDIMP1P2P3P4P5P6P7P8P9

MODEL NUMBERGRTx1x

in10-32.231.49239°.484.670.276.098.048

mmM5 x 0.8

5.912.539°12.317.07.02.51.2


TOOLING LENGTH FACTOR

DERA

TING

FAC

TOR

4[102]

3[76]

2[51]

1[25]

0

1.0

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

05

[127]

CHART A

TOOLING LENGTH inch [mm]

6[152]

7[178]

8[203]

GRTx

3xGR

Tx4x

GRTx

5x

GRTx

6x

GRTx

7x

GRTx

8x

GRTx

1xGR

Tx2x




lb49

141337419528562652731

N218625150018652350250029003250

Fain-lb405276127275587

11902486

Nm4.569143166134281

OPEN Mx*in-lb41133221309398707884

1591

Nm4.61525354580

100180

Myin-lb4413313322148657511052077

Nm51515255565125235

MzMODEL NO.


MAX. ALLOWABLE FORCES & MOMENTS ON GRIPPER JAWS

in-lb116221265398796

128223875083

Nm1325304590

145270574

CLOSE Mx

LETTERDIMØ B1

B2Ø B9 MAXØ B9 MIN

C1C2C3C4K3K4K5K7K9

K10

P5P6

Ø P7Ø P8

P9

MODEL NUMBERGRTx1x

in1.8501.0041.06501.06101.2401.358.236.118.3741.1221.2961.4968-32

x .394 DP0.1268

x .315 DP.484.670.276.098.048

mm47.025.527.126.931.534.56.03.09.528.532.938.0

M4 x 0.7x .394 DP

3.0x .315 DP

12.317.07.02.51.2

HEAVY FORCESPRING ASSIST

PART EJECTOR

LETTERDIMB2

Ø EJ1Ø EJ2Ø EJ3EJ4EJ5EJ6EJ7

Ø EJ8EJ9EJ10EJ11EJ12EJ13EJ14

MODEL NUMBERGRTx1x

in1.0042.330N/A.700N/AN/AN/AN/AN/A

1.1261.362.062.0621.0611.297

mm25.559.2N/A17.8N/AN/AN/AN/AN/A28.634.61.61.626.932.9

MODELNO.


lb3 - 5

4.5 - 8.47.5 - 1111 -1820 - 2827 - 3835 - 5674 - 96

N13 - 2220 - 3733 - 5151 - 8088 - 124121 - 167157 - 248330 - 427

PART EJECTORTOTAL SPRING FORCE

GRIPPER MOUNTING KIT

KIT NUMBERFASTENER

(SHCS)

MODEL NUMBERSPRING ASSISTUNIT GRT112

64128-016-32 x1-1/4

GRT51264129-01M3 x 0.5

x 30

Refer to Catalog 2000 6A-66 Refer to Catalog 2000 6A-66




Unknown


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 10-15-02 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERSPAGE 1 OF 3 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES GRB

Notify existing customers of this design change effective 11/22/02.


TO ORDER SPECIFY:Product, Series, Type, Jaw Variation, Jaw, Design No.,Bore Size, Total Jaw Rotation, and Options required.

NOTE: Design number dictates imperial or metricmounting holes, dowel pin holes, and ports.

1 - UB15-M18012 x1BRG

PRODUCTG - Gripper

SERIESR - Regular Duty

TYPEB - 180° Angular

JAW VARIATION1 - Non-locking

JAW1 - Style 1

- 2

DESIGN NO.(See Note)

2 - Imperial6 - Metric

-

OPTIONS(OMIT IF NOT REQUIRED)

PORTING OPTIONUB15 - Port option in location 15

SWITCH OPTIONSCU - Proximity switch readyM - Magnet for Series 6790 Switches

BORE SIZEDiameter

mm121620324050

(in)(.472)(.630)(.787)(1.260)(1.575)(1.969)

TOTAL JAWROTATION(DEGREES)

180 (Standard)9060

SERIES 6790 SOLID STATE & REED SWITCHESPART NUMBER

67902-1-0267902-1-0567903-1-0267903-1-0567904-1-0267904-1-05

67922-167923-167924-163549-0263549-05

DESCRIPTIONPNP (Source) or NPN (Sink) DC Reed, 4.5-30 VDC, 2 Meter CablePNP (Source) or NPN (Sink) DC Reed, 4.5-30 VDC, 5 Meter CableNPN (Sink) Solid State, 4.5-30 VDC, 2 Meter CableNPN (Sink) Solid State, 4.5-30 VDC, 5 Meter CablePNP (Source) Solid State, 4.5-30 VDC, 2 Meter CablePNP (Source) Solid State, 4.5-30 VDC, 5 Meter CablePNP (Source) or NPN (Sink) DC Reed, 4.5-30 VDC, Quick ConnectNPN (Sink) Solid State, 4.5-30 VDC, Quick ConnectPNP (Source) Solid State, 4.5-30 VDC, Quick Connect2 Meter Cordset with Quick Connect5 Meter Cordset with Quick Connect

4 mm ROUND INDUCTIVE PROXIMITY SWITCHESPART NUMBER18430-001-0218430-002-02

DESCRIPTIONNPN (Sink) 10-30 VDC, 2 meter cablePNP (Source) 10-30 VDC, 2 meter cable

PROXIMITY SWITCHMOUNTING KITS

SIZE121620324050

KIT NUMBER180741809018075180911809118091

Each kit contains 1 target,1 switch mounting bracket,and fasteners for mounting.Switches sold separately.

GRIPPER SIZE121620324050

PORT SIZE10-32 UNC-2B10-32 UNC-2B10-32 UNC-2B

1/8 NPT1/8 NPT1/8 NPT

KIT NUMBER70695-0170695-0170695-0170695-0370695-0370695-03

NOTE: EACH KIT CONTAINS 1 FLOW CONTROL

IMPERIAL FLOW CONTROLS

GRIPPER SIZE121620324050

PORT SIZEM5 x 0.8M5 x 0.8M5 x 0.81/8 BSP1/8 BSP1/8 BSP

KIT NUMBER70696-0170696-0170696-0170696-0370696-0370696-03

NOTE: EACH KIT CONTAINS 1 FLOW CONTROL

METRIC FLOW CONTROLS

STANDARDPORT IN

LOCATION 48OPTION:PORTS INLOCATION 15

180°

60°

90°

Design Change To Series GRB Grippers

Effective November 22, 2002, PHD will be releasing a redesigned Series GRB Gripper. All orders received after this date will requireconversion to the new design. Below is the new ordering data for the new –2 and –6 design plus a general overview of the majorDESIGN IMPROVEMENTS. Although the redesign is a drop-in replacement for existing grippers, there are some issues that requirereview and qualification with existing customers who will be replacing their current design GRB in the future. See the IMPORTANTNOTES section on page 2 of 3.

Also included is a conversion chart to assist you in converting from the old design to the equivalent new design model numbers. Thischart includes the top 50 design 1 and 5 Grippers sold during the past 2 years. See page 3 of 3.

ORDERING DATA: SERIES GRB, DESIGN 2 & 6





DESIGN IMPROVEMENTS

■ Increased grip force

■ Improved precision through decreased jaw side play

■ Larger piston rod and jaw driver provide a significantly more rugged gripper

■ One piece body provides superior interchangeability

■ Internal speed restriction removes the need for external speed controls instandard applications

■ Longer life seals

■ Increased diameter jaw pivot pins, on the smaller sizes, provide for a more robust gripper

■ Series 6790 Solid State and Reed switches now available on all sizes and provide a lower cost switch solution which fits withinbody slots

■ Dowel pin holes added to jaws allow for simplified tooling and improved gripper interchangeability

■ Proximity switches and kits are interchangeable between Design 1, [5] and Design 2, [6]

IMPORTANT NOTES

■ The Design 2, [6] GRB is engineered to utilize PHD’s Series 6790 Solid State and Reed switches. The Series 5360 Hall Effectswitches used on the Design 1, [5] GRB WILL NOT work on the new design units. In the event that a Design 2, [6] GRB gripper isreplacing a Design 1,[5] GRB, the switches will need to be replaced.

■ Because the Design 2, [6] GRB gripper utilizes Series 6790 switches, some minor dimensional changes to the size 12, 16, & 32were required. Material has been added to the switch slot face of the gripper, .060 inch on the size 12, .040 inch on the size 16,and .060 inch on the size 32. This change DID NOT AFFECT the relationship between the mounting faces of the gripper body andthe mounting holes in the jaws.

■ Internal flow controls are no longer available. If a customer needs to reduce the jaw actuation speed, external flow controls maybe purchased as accessories.

■ The corrosion resistant option is no longer available. This option must now be purchased as a Custom Product.

■ The 15°, 60°, & 75° jaw rotations (30°, 120°, & 150° total jaw rotation, respectively) are no longer available. If these rotations arenecessary, they must be purchased as a Custom Product.





GRB ORDERING DATA CONVERSION TABLEDesign 1, [5]Ordering Data Equivalent Design 2, [6] Ordering Data Notes

SIZE 12 GRB121-1-5401GRB121-1 0401GRB121-1-0101GRB521-1-5401GRB521-1-0401GRB121-1-5451GRB121-1-0411GRB121-1-0451GRB521-1-0411GRB131-1-5401GRB131-1-0401GRB131-1-0101GRB131-1-5101GRB531-1-5401GRB131-1-5131GRB131-1-0431GRB131-1-5441GRB131-1-5151GRB231-1-0101GRB141-1-5401GRB541-1-5401GRB141-1-0401GRB141-1-0101GRB541-1-2401GRB141-1-2941GRB141-1-0931GRB141-1-2901GRB141-1-5901GRB141-1-0901GRB141-1-2401GRB141-1-2101GRB241-1-0101GRB141-1-2421GRB141-1-0451GRB151-1-0401GRB151-1-5401GRB151-1-5101GRB151-1-0901GRB151-1-2401GRB151-1-5901GRB151-1-2901GRB151-1-2451GRB251-1-2401GRB251-1-5401GRB161-1-0401GRB161-1-5401GRB161-1-2401GRB161-1-2901GRB161-1-5901GRB261-1-5901

GRB11-2-12 X 180-CUGRB11-2-12 X 180GRB11-2-12 X 180-UB15GRB11-6-12 X 180-CUGRB11-6-12 X 180GRB11-2-12 X 60-CUGRB11-2-12 X 180GRB11-2-12 X 60GRB11-6-12 X 180GRB11-2-16 X 180-CUGRB11-2-16 X 180GRB11-2-16 X 180-UB15GRB11-2-16 X 180-UB15-CUGRB11-6-16 X 180-CUGRB11-2-16 X 90-UB15-CUGRB11-2-16 X 90GRB11-2-16 X 60-CUGRB11-2-16 X 60-CU-UB15GRB11-2-16 X 180-UB15GRB11-2-20 X 180-CUGRB11-6-20 X 180-CUGRB11-2-20 X 180GRB11-2-20 X 180-UB15GRB11-6-20 X 180-MGRB11-2-20 X 60-MGRB11-2-20 X 90GRB11-2-20 X 180-MGRB11-2-20 X 180-CUGRB11-2-20 X 180GRB11-2-20 X 180-MGRB11-2-20 X 180-M-UB15GRB11-2-20 X 180-UB15GRB11-2-20 X 90-MGRB11-2-20 X 60GRB11-2-32 X 180GRB11-2-32 X 180-CUGRB11-2-32 X 180-CU-UB15GRB11-2-32 X 180GRB11-2-32 X 180-MGRB11-2-32 X 180-CUGRB11-2-32 X 180-MGRB11-2-32 X 180-MGRB11-6-32 X 180-MGRB11-2-32 X 180-CUGRB11-2-40 X 180GRB11-2-40 X 180-CUGRB11-2-40 X 180-MGRB11-2-40 X 180-MGRB11-2-40 X 180-CUGRB11-2-40 X 180-CU

SEE NOTE 4, RECOMMEND 60°SEE NOTE 4, RECOMMEND 180°SEE NOTE 4, RECOMMEND 60°SEE NOTE 4, RECOMMEND 180°

SEE NOTE 4, RECOMMEND 60°SEE NOTE 2

SEE NOTE 1SEE NOTES 1 & 3SEE NOTE 3SEE NOTES 1 & 3SEE NOTE 3SEE NOTE 3SEE NOTE 1SEE NOTE 1SEE NOTE 2SEE NOTES 1 & 4, RECOMMEND 90°SEE NOTE 4, RECOMMEND 60°

SEE NOTE 3SEE NOTE 1SEE NOTE 3SEE NOTES 1 & 3SEE NOTES 1 & 4, RECOMMEND 60°SEE NOTES 1 & 2SEE NOTE 2

SEE NOTE 1SEE NOTES 1 & 3SEE NOTE 3SEE NOTES 2 & 3

SIZE 16

SIZE 20

SIZE 32

SIZE 40

NOTES:1) -M OPTION REQUIRES SERIES 6790 SWITCHES, EXISTING SWITCHES MUST BE REPLACED.2) CORROSION RESISTANT IS NO LONGER OFFERED AS STANDARD, AND CAN BE MADE AS A CUSTOM PRODUCT.3) INTERNAL FLOW CONTROLS ARE NO LONGER AVAILABLE, EXTERNAL FLOW CONTROLS ARE AVAILABLE AS ACCESSORIES.4) THIS JAW ROTATION IS NO LONGER AVAILABLE AS STANDARD. USE OTHER ROTATION OR ORDER AS CUSTOM PRODUCT.


REQUIRED ACTION:



Ensure potential customers are aware of this correction to Catalog 2003.


SERIES GRB CORRECTED ENGINEERING DATAVarious specifications and performance data has been inaccurately published in Catalog 2003 for the SeriesGRB Grippers. Corrected information appears on the following pages. These replace pages 6B-6, 6B-8, 6B-9,and 6B-10 in Catalog 2003. Corrected information and charts are highlighted (shaded).

SPECIFICATIONS

NOMINALTOTAL JAWROTATION

180°180°180°180°180°180°

SIZE121620324050

EXTERNALGRIP

INTERNALGRIP

Imperial0.0650.180.611.93.712

Metric1062999943170608919964

Imperial0.0830.210.752.44.314

Metric13634612213951704922864

GRIP FORCE FACTOR GF

DISPLACEMENTin3

0.090.210.381.332.847.00

cm3

1.43.56.22247

115

GRIPPERWEIGHT

lb0.280.550.982.24.311.5

kg0.130.250.450.982.05.2

CLOSE TIME87 psi [6 bar]

sec0.120.250.260.410.550.56

OPEN TIME87 psi [6 bar]

sec0.070.130.130.190.300.32

JAW PIVOT

F/2 F/2

F = Total Grip Force

PART

TOOLING LENGTH= 1.75 in [44.5 mm]

GRIP FORCE CALCULATION EXAMPLE:

Example: GRB11-2-20 x 180, [GRB11-6-20 x 180]Operating Pressure = 87 psi [6 bar]Find Tooling Length (Distance Between Jaw Pivot and Gripping Point): Desired tooling length is1.75 in [44.5 mm].Find Jaw Angle at Point of Grip: Jaws will be parallel (0°) at point of grip.Determine Force Multipler Based on Jaw Angle at Point of Grip: Because jaws are parallel (0°)at point of grip, force multiplier = 1 (from Force Multiplier Graph above).Find Grip Factor (GF) = .61 [994] (from Specifications p. 6)Total Grip Force = ((87 psi x .61) / 1.75) x 1 = 30.3 lb [((6 bar x 994) / 44.5) x 1 = 134 N]

PRESSURE (psi) x GF

DISTANCE FROM JAW PIVOT (in)x FORCE MULTIPLIER = TOTAL GRIP FORCE (lb)

PRESSURE [bar] x GF

DISTANCE FROM JAW PIVOT [mm]x FORCE MULTIPLIER = TOTAL GRIP FORCE [N]

Refer to Catalog 2003, Page 6B-6



TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN: G16 PAGE 2 OF 3


SIZE 122.25

2.00

1.75

1.50

1.25

1.00

.75

.50

.25

040 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280

CYCLE TIME (ms/90°)

TOOL

ING

INER

TIA

(lb-in

2 )

CYCLE TIME (ms/90°)60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320

SIZE 16

TOOL

ING

INER

TIA

(lb-in

2 )


60

50

40

30

20

10

0120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380

SIZE 40

TOOL

ING

INER

TIA

(lb-in

2 )


9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

060 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320

SIZE 20

TOOL

ING

INER

TIA

(lb-in

2 )

[6.6]

[5.9]

[5.1]

[4.4]

[3.7]

[2.9]

[2.2]

[1.5]

[.73]

[0]

TOOL

ING

INER

TIA

[x 1

0-4 k

g-m

2 ]

[8.0]

[7.3]

[6.6]

[5.9]

[5.1]

[4.4]

[3.7]

[2.9]

[2.2]

[1.5]

[.73]

[0]

TOOL

ING

INER

TIA

[x 1

0-4 k

g-m

2 ]

[26]

[23]

[21]

[18]

[15]

[12]

[8.8]

[5.9]

[2.9]

[0]

TOOL

ING

INER

TIA

[x 1

0-4 k

g-m

2 ]

[176]

[146]

[117]

[88]

[59]

[29]

[0]

TOOL

ING

INER

TIA

[x 1

0-4 k

g-m

2 ]

15

12

9

6

3

060 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320

SIZE 32


TOOL

ING

INER

TIA

(lb-in

2 )

200

180

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 440

SIZE 50


TOOL

ING

INER

TIA

(lb-in

2 )

[583]

[527]

[468]

[410]

[351]

[293]

[234]

[176]

[117]

[59]

[0]

TOOL

ING

INER

TIA

[x 1

0-4 k

g-m

2 ]

[44]

[35]

[26]

[18]

[8.8]

[0]TO

OLIN

G IN

ERTI

A [x

10-4

kg-

m2 ]

2.75

2.50

2.25

2.00

1.75

1.50

1.25

1.00

.75

.50

.25

0

JAW TOOLINGJaw tooling must be sized in

such a manner as to keep the total jawtooling inertia (per jaw) in the shadedareas of the charts below. Use thecalculation example on page 10 as atemplate for your tooling design.

R2R1

HA

WALA

HB

LB

WB

PART A

PART B

AXIS Z1

AXIS Z2

AXIS Z(TOTAL JAW

TOOLING INERTIAIS CALCULATED

ABOUT THIS AXIS)

JAW TOOLING INERTIA GRAPHS(PER JAW)



TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN: G16 PAGE 3 OF 3


JAW TOOLING INERTIA CALCULATION(PER JAW)

STEP 1:Determine the Gripper Size, Jaw Tooling Dimensions, andGripper Opening Time.

STEP 2:Calculate the moments of inertia for the Jaw Tooling.

PART A

Calculation of Jaw Tooling Mass:MA = LA x HA x WA x Mass Density of Jaw Tooling Material

Moment of Inertia Calculation for the Jaw Tooling about Axis Z1:IZ1 = (1/12) x (MA) x (HA

2 + LA2)

Moment of Inertia Calculation for the Jaw Tooling about Axis Z:IZA = IZ1 + (MA x R12)

PART B

Calculation of Jaw Tooling Mass:MB = LB x HB x WB x Mass Density of Jaw Tooling Material

Moment of Inertia Calculation for the Jaw Tooling about Axis Z2:IZ2 = (1/12) x (MB) x (HB

2 + LB2)

Moment of Inertia Calculation for the Jaw Tooling about Axis Z:IZB = IZ2 + (MB x R22)

TOTAL JAW TOOLING INERTIA:ITOTAL = IZA + IZB

STEP 3:Verify Jaw Tooling Inertia by comparing ITOTAL with Jaw ToolingInertia graph.

EXAMPLE:

STEP 1:Gripper Size: 20, Jaw Tooling Dimensions: see graphic, GripperOpening Time: 130 ms

STEP 2:PART A

LA = .500 in [.013 m]HA = .625 in [.016 m]WA = .750 in [.019 m]Mass Density of Aluminum = .098 lb/in3 [2712.6 kg/m3]R1 = 3.000 in [.075 m]

Calculation of Jaw Tooling Mass:MA = .500 in x .625 in x .750 in x .098 lb/in3

[.013 m x .016 m x .019 m x 2712.6 kg/m3]MA = .023 lb [.011 kg]

Moment of Inertia Calculation for the Jaw Tooling about Axis Z1:IZ1 = (1/12) x (.023 lb) x (.6252 in + .5002 in)

[(1/12) x (.011 kg) x (.0162 m + .0132 m)]IZ1 = .0013 lb-in2 [3.9 x 10-7 kg-m2]

Moment of Inertia Calculation for the Jaw Tooling about Axis Z:IZA = .0013 lb-in2 + (.023 lb x 3.0002 in)

[3.9 x 10-7 kg-m2 + (.011 kg x .0752 kg)]IZA = .208 lb-in2 [6.2 x 10-5 kg-m2]

PART BLB = 2.500 in [.064 m]HB = .350 in [.009 m]WB = .600 in [.015 m]Mass Density of Aluminum = .098 lb/in3 [2712.6 kg/m3]R2 = 2.000 in [.051 m]

Calculation of Jaw Tooling Mass:MB = 2.500 in x .350 in x .600 in x .098 lb/in3

[.064 m x .009 m x .015 m x 2712.6 kg/m3]MB = .051 lb [.023 kg]

Moment of Inertia Calculation for the Jaw Tooling about Axis Z2:IZ2 = (1/12) x (.051 lb) x (.3502 in + 2.5002 in)

[(1/12) x (.023 kg) x (.0092 m + .0642 m)]IZ2 = .027 lb-in2 [8.0 x 10-6 kg-m2]

Moment of Inertia Calculation for the Jaw Tooling about Axis Z:IZB = .027 lb-in2 + (.051 lb x 2.0002 in)

[8.0 x 10-6 kg-m2 + (.023 kg x .0512 m)]IZB = .231 lb-in2 [6.8 x 10-5 kg-m2]

TOTAL JAW TOOLING INERTIA:ITOTAL = .208 lb-in2 + .231 lb-in2

[6.2 x 10-5 kg-m2 + 6.8 x 10-5 kg-m2]ITOTAL = .439 lb-in2 [1.3 x 10-4 kg-m2]

STEP 3:

R2R1

HA

WALA

PART A

AXIS Z1

AXIS Z2

AXIS Z(TOTAL JAW


ABOUT THIS AXIS)

R2R1

HB

LB

WB

PART B

AXIS Z1

AXIS Z2

AXIS Z(TOTAL JAW


ABOUT THIS AXIS)

ITOTAL


9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

060 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320

SIZE 20

TOOL

ING

INER

TIA

(lb-in

2 )

[26]

[23]

[21]

[18]

[15]

[12]

[8.8]

[5.9]

[2.9]

[0]

TOOL

ING

INER

TIA

[x 1

0-4 k

g-m

2 ]



REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 5-5-05 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES GRS & SERIES GRF


New Switch Kit Numbers for Series GRS/GRF Grippers

In March 2005, performance inconsistencies with the Series 6790 switches were discovered on Series GRSand Series GRF Grippers. To address this issue, changes were made to the magnet to improve theperformance of each style of 6790 switch.

Following is a cross-reference guide for the new switch kits used in conjunction with Series GRS and SeriesGRF Gripper products.

Series GRS Grippers Switch Kit Cross-ReferenceNew Kit Number New Kit Number

Gripper Size Old Kit Number for 6790 for 6790REED Switches MR Switches (Solid State)

27 70664-27 76108-27 76107-2728 70664-27 76108-27 76107-2732 70664-32 76108-32 76107-3250 70664-50 76108-50 76107-5063 70664-63 76108-63 76107-63

Series GRF Gripper Switch Kit Cross-ReferenceNew Kit Number New Kit Number

Gripper Size Old Kit Number for 6790 for 6790REED Switches MR Switches (Solid State)

19 KIT DID NOT CHANGE: USE 73723-1925 73723-25 76113-25 76112-2528 73723-28 76113-28 76112-2832 73723-32 76113-32 76112-32

Customers ordering Series GRS and Series GRF Grippers should be advised of the new switch kits availablefor 6790 Switches.

FILE UNDER SWITCHES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER

REQUIRED ACTION:

TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SW1

DATE: 4-4-91 PRODUCT TYPE: REED SWITCHESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: AN12-6, 12, 20 AB12-1

13109-02-06, 12 7518-01-06, 12

Customers who experienced quality problems on these switches should be made aware of theimprovement.


In June of 1990, PHD began molding some models of cylinder mounted proximity switches with anew 20% glass fiber filled compound.

The purpose of this product change was to address several incidents in the field where Reed typeswitches had experienced failure. A percentage of these failures was attributed to excessiveshrinkage of the plastic molded material. If shrinkage occurred it could potentially crack the glassencapsulated Reed switch.

The switch models affected by this change are as follows:

AN12 - 6, 12, or 20 ..... 10 Watt Reed Switch with 6, 12, or 20 foot CableAB12 - 1 ...................... 10 Watt Reed Switch with Quick Connect13109 - 02 - 06,12 ...... 3 Amp Reed Gated Triac with 6 or 12 foot Cable7518 - 01 - 06, 12 ....... Sink/Source Hall Effect Switch with 6 or 12 foot Cable

Design number changes were not necessary since each product has a date code molded into thepackage. All products with a date code of 6/90 or later will be made of this new glass filled material.

The old switches were transparent colored, but the new switches appear cloudy colored.



DATE: 4-10-91 PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: HALL EFFECT MODEL 17504-1-06

It has recently come to our attention that there have been some problems in the field relating to theinstallation of PHD Hall Effect Switch model #17504-1-06. The problem stems from the shield withinthe switch cable. Internally this shield should not come in contact with any of the cable conductors.However, in approximately 10% of models produced prior to 01/15/91, the possibility existed that theshield could contact the white wire.

The white wire is the output of the switch, and as this unit is a sourcing type unit, if this shield wereattached to ground, the output of the switch could become shorted causing the switch to eitherpermanently or intermittently fail.

In some instances the condition is not discovered unless the cable is flexed near the switch.

In many applications the shield of switch cables is ignored and therefore this situation does notcause a problem.

REQUIRED ACTION:If you believe that you have experienced this problem or have this product installed on equipmentwhere there is some immediate concern then we suggest that this condition be checked for. Asimple power off continuity test with a buzz box or ohmmeter across the white wire and shield shouldtell. A GOOD unit should show NO continuity between the white wire and the shield. If you find thatyou do have some of these units in your possession, PHD will exchange them for current units wherethis problem has been corrected.




DATE: 4-25-91 PRODUCT TYPE: SENSORS &SET-POINT MODULESPAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: HALL EFFECT, ALL SET-POINTSThe PHD Set-Point Module with Hall Effect Sensors was first introduced in the Fall of '84. Since then,

thousands of Gripper and Rotary Actuators with Sensor and Set-Point Module systems have been success-fully implemented in the field.

Occasionally there have been some systems installed that have proven to be less successful. Thepurpose of this Technical Data Bulletin is to inform the user of some of the pitfalls that can occur and how toavoid them.

DescriptionThe PHD Set-Point Module is a very simple circuit employing a voltage regulator, a quad comparator, four

trim pots, and four output transistors. The Set-Point Module is fairly temperature stable and exhibits very littledrift of signal over a wide range of supply voltage fluctuations.

The PHD Sensor is a Linear Output Hall Effect Transducer (LOHET) which is constructed on a ceramicsubstrate giving it extremely stable operating characteristics over fairly wide temperature ranges.

FunctionThe most common configuration of the system is on a PHD Gripper or Rotary Actuator. Typically a rotat-

ing member of these actuators will have a magnet affixed to it which in turn rotates at the face of the sensor.The magnet is constructed such that opposite poles will be presented to the sensor at each end of motion.The sensor will produce an increasing voltage as the polarity of the magnet changes from North to South.This signal is then conducted to the Set-Point Module through the Sensor cable.

The Set-Point Module has four trimming potentiometer adjustments located on the side of the case.These pots are independent of one another and may be adjusted to coincide with the signal returned by theSensor at any position of actuator travel. Once adjusted, the corresponding outputs and LED indicators willturn on whenever the Sensor signal has passed through the set point.

Performance FactorsFactors which can affect the performance of a PHD Sensor and Set-Point Module system are as follows:

Mechanical ConsiderationsCharacterized by "crisp" transitions from off to on of the LED indicators, but Set-Points will appear

to have drifted.1. Variations in air pressure can cause tooling to flex. When this happens the magnet can

actually pivot very slightly. This inconsistency can cause Set-Points to appear to drift.

2. Tooling attached to grippers may be moved during setups or as a result of a machinecollision. If either of these situations occurs, then Set-Points should be readjusted.

3. Wear over time may take place on the tooling surfaces or in the gripper pivot pin bushings.As wear occurs the pivotal stopping positions of the magnet may change thereby causingSet-Points to change.



DATE: 4-25-91 PRODUCT TYPE: SENSORS &SET-POINT MODULESPAGE 2 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: HALL EFFECT, ALL SET-POINTS

FILE UNDER SWITCHES IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDERPHD, Inc. • 10216 Airport Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN 46899 U.S.A. • Phone (219) 747-6151 • Fax (219) 747-6754

Double check all future applications to make sure they conform to the criteria on this Technical Data Sheet.

REQUIRED ACTION:Figure 1 Schematic

Electrical ConsiderationsTypically indicated by the lack of "crisp" on and off transitions of the LED indicators.

1. Sensor cables should always be isolated physically from other wiring such as servo orStepper Motor cables and valve solenoid wiring.

2. The Set-Point Module uses an on-board voltage regulator circuit to supply voltage to thesensing system. Severe fluctuations of the DC supply to the Set-Point Module can causeinconsistent performance.

3. The Sensor cable includes a shield in contact with a groundable drain wire. This drain wiremay be grounded to either machine ground or 0 Volts DC. There is no hard and fast ruleas to which of these will yield the best shield for the signal.

4. If high electrical interference is present, it may be filtered with a resistor and capacitornetwork as shown in the schematic in figure 1. Initial values for R and C are shown. Theonly way to observe this interference is with an oscilloscope attached to the white andblack wires of the sensor cable. A volt meter is not fast enough.

Application RecommendationsAlthough PHD Sensor and Set-Point Module systems are capable of some fairly fine discriminations, they

are not recommended for applications of measuring parts. This is due to variations that will occur in partsand/or tooling based on fluctuations of operating pressures and temperatures.

Suggested applications would be for inspection for presence of parts, i.e., signals to indicate when thegripper is open, closed on a part, or missed a part. Remember to allow for a fair amount of jaw travel tocontinue in the event of a missed part. If the tooling should restrict the amount of residual jaw travel aftermissing a part, then the system may have difficulty detecting this small additional travel.

Additional applications would include those that require the sorting of parts that have a significant differ-ence in physical size.

Also applications that inspect for specific physical geometry on parts such as the presence of flats, hexesor significant difference in sizes of holes in parts.

BLACKRED

WHITE

R = 750 OHM 1/4 WATTC = 22 MICRO FARRAD

+

R

C

-

18-24VDC

SUPPLY123456789

10

+ 18-24 VDC

TRNS POS

TRNS SIG A

TRNS SIG B

OUTPUT A1

OUTPUT A2

OUTPUT B1

OUTPUT B2+ 4.5-24 VDC

SOURCEONLY

-0 VDC


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 7-6-92 PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL PHD PROXIMITY SWITCHES

Inform your customers of this potential problem and of the easy solution shown above.


Proximity SwitchCablesPneumatic Tubing

Wire Tie

CORRECTINCORRECT

Caution must be taken when using wire ties on PHD proximity switch cables. Crimping of the cableby extremely tight wire ties may cause the wire braids to break. The outer jacket may appearundamaged while the internal strain has severed the fine wire inside. This is especially true of theModel 18430-xxx-xx 4mm round and 18431-xxx-xx 6 mm square proximity switches.

The solution is to use less tension when installing the wire ties and use additional shielding to protectthe switch cable. The use of pneumatic tubing is ideal for protecting the cable while securing it withwire ties.

Caution When Using Wire Ties


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 8-3-92 PRODUCT TYPE: AC REED SWITCHESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: AN12-6, AB12, 17501-1-06, 17521-1, 15900-1

Qualify all AC Reed Switch applications and specify 15901-1 3 amp Reed Switches wheneverpossible.


AC Reed Switches Used with Allen Bradley ControllersIn some applications, PHD AC type Reed Switches are failing where they are used as inputs to AllenBradley Model SLC100, SLC 150, SLC 500, and SLC 501 controllers. This is due to the inrushcurrent produced by the Allen Bradley controller which far exceeds the maximum limits of most PHDReed Switches.

These applications require the use of the PHD 15901-1 3 amp Reed Switch. It is recommended thatany applications for the following PHD AC Reed Switches be qualified as to their specific use.

AN12-6 Reed SwitchAB12 Reed Switch with Quick Connect17501-1-06 Compact Reed Switch17521-1 Compact Reed Switch with Quick Connect15900-1 Liquid Resistant Reed Switch

The above switches may not work with Allen Bradley Model SLC 100, SLC 150, SLC 500, and SLC501 controllers without additional current limiting protection.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 3-1-94 PRODUCT TYPE: LIQUID RESISTANT REED SWITCHESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 15900-1

None required.


15900-1 LED Works On DC Sink Or SourceStarting in April, all 15900-1 Liquid Resistant Reed Switches will contain a bipolar LED indicator thatwill work on both DC sink and source applications. The original design contained an LED indicatorthat only functioned when used in a current sourcing application.

Shown below are schematics for wiring these switches in the DC sink and source modes. Theseimproved switches will be shipped with new packers indicating the bipolar LED and proper wiringinstructions.

15900-1 Switch Wiring Schematic DC Application -Sink Circuit

15900-1 Switch Wiring Schematic DC Application -Source Circuit

+ DC

– DC

Pin 2

Pin 3

Pin 1

LOAD

Pin 2

Pin 3

Pin 1

LOAD

– DC

+ DC

Bipolar LED emits a green light in the sinking circuitand a red light in the sourcing circuit.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 1-1-95 PRODUCT TYPE: COMPACT PROXIMITY SWITCHESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 17509-01-06, 17529

Suggest that any customers with requirements for 10 watt power capacities on AC service use 17501or 17521 Compact Switches. (See Catalog 93 page 7-8)


17509 AND 17529 Wattage Rating ChangeThe power capacity rating on 17509-01-06 (plain) and 17529 (Quick Connect) current limitingCompact Proximity Switches has changed from 10 watt to 2.5 watt maximum.

This revision is identified through a design number change.

PART NUMBERS POWER CAPACITY

OLD SWITCH 17509-01-06 17529 10 WATT

REVISED SWITCH 17509-02-06 17529-2 2.5 WATT

The 17509-02-06 will begin phasing into production around February 1, 1995.

The 17529-2 started shipping around December 1, 1994.

PHD will automatically update orders to the revised switches as they are available. This change willhave little effect on customer applications because higher watt applications are extremely rare.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 1-1-95 PRODUCT TYPE: MINIATURE PROXIMITY SWITCHESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 53609-1-02, 53629-1

Suggest that any customers with requirements for 10 watt power capacities on AC service use53601-1-02 or 53621 Compact Switches. (See Catalog Addendum SW03)


53609 and 53629 Wattage Rating ChangeThe power capacity rating on 53609-1-02 (plain) and 53629-1 (Quick Connect) current limitingCompact Proximity Switches has changed from 10 watt to 2.5 watt maximum.

This revision is identified through a design number change.

PART NUMBERS POWER CAPACITY

OLD SWITCH 53609-1-02 53629-1 10 WATT

REVISED SWITCH 53609-2-02 53629-2 2.5 WATT

The 53609-2-02 & 53629-2 will begin phasing into production around March 15, 1995.

PHD will automatically update orders to the revised switches as they are available. This change willhave little effect on customer applications because higher watt applications are extremely rare.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 9-20-95 PRODUCT TYPE: REED SWITCHESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL 1750 COMPACT REED SWITCHES

Distributors should return any Series 1750 Compact Reed Switch inventory to PHD for retrofit withthe new softer O-rings. Inform any of your customers who may have experienced Series 1750Compact Reed Switch failures.


Solution for Faulty 1750 Reed SwitchesSeries 1750 Reed Switches have been subject to sporadic and inconsistent failures over the pastseveral months. PHD has identified and corrected the source for these sporadic switch failures.

It was discovered that in some cases, the force exerted by the switch brackets was enough to bendor deflect the reed contained in the molded switch. Given the right circumstances, this deflection wasenough to crack the reed causing premature switch failure.

As of 9-7-95 all Series 1750 Reed Switches shipped from PHD, Inc., have a softer durometer O-ringwhich greatly reduces the force exerted on the switches and eliminates the premature switch failure.These revised switch assemblies are identified by a clipped corner on the switch label attached tothe cable.

These premature switch failures applied only to the following Series 1750 Reed Switches. Series1750 Hall Effect Switches were NOT affected and have not experienced any abnormal failure rates.

AFFECTED REED SWITCHESPart No. Color Description17502-1-06 White Sink or Source Type 4.5-24 VDC17501-1-06 Blue AC Type 65-120 VAC17509-2-06 Green AC Type 110-120 VAC with Current Limit17522-1 White Sink or Source Type VDC, Quick Connect17521-1 Blue AC Type 65-120 VAC, Quick Connect17529-2 Green AC Type 110-120 VAC, Quick Connect with Current Limit

Softer DurometerO-ring

Identified by clippedcorner on tag.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 2-9-96 PRODUCT TYPE: REED SWITCHESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL 1750 COMPACT REED SWITCHES

As necessary. All Series 1750 Compact Reed Switches with either a clipped tag or a date code of9538 or later has the O-ring solution.


Date Coding of Series 1750 SolutionPer Technical Data Bulletin SW9, PHD identified and corrected the problem with the Series 1750Reed Switches. Effective immediately, PHD is no longer clipping the corner of the tag to identify theinclusion of the softer Durometer O-ring. Identification of the corrected switches can now be made bythe date code on the switch. (See below.)

NOTE: This applies ONLY to the Series 1750 Reed Switches. Series 1750 Hall Effect Switches werenot affected.

Softer DurometerO-ring

Date of 9538 (38th weekof 1995) or later containsthe o-ring solution.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 2-9-96 PRODUCT TYPE: HALL SWITCHESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 5360 & 5580 HALL EFFECT

Inform customers as necessary of this product improvement.


Transient Voltage ProtectionAs part of PHD's continual product improvement, PHD has enhanced the Series 5360 and 5580 HallEffect Switches by adding transient protection. This is accomplished by adding a zener diode to theswitch which reduces potential damage as a result of voltage spikes.

• No design number change was necessary to reflect this improvement.• This added feature is stated in Catalog 96.• This enhancement is being phased into current inventory with an estimated completion

date of 4-30-96.

AFFECTED SWITCHES

COLORYellow

RedYellow

Red

PART NO.55803-1-0255804-1-0255823-155824-1

DESCRIPTIONNPN (Sink) 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cablePNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cableNPN (Sink) 4.5-24 VDC, Quick ConnectPNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC, Quick Connect

SERIES 5580 (HALL)

COLORYellow

RedYellow

Red

PART NO.53603-1-0253604-1-0253623-153624-1

DESCRIPTIONNPN (Sink) 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cablePNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC, 2 meter cableNPN (Sink) 4.5-24 VDC, Quick ConnectPNP (Source) 4.5-24 VDC, Quick Connect

SERIES 5360 (HALL)


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 5-5-97 PRODUCT TYPE: REED SWITCHESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 1750 & 5360 REED SWITCHES

Inform affected customers of this upcoming change.


Phase Out of 1750 & 5360 AC Switches

Eliminating Series 5360 Miniature Recommended Replacement& 1750 Proximity Switches 65-120 V.A.C Switch with Current Limiting Feature

• 53601-1-02 • 53609-2-02• 53621-1 • 53629-2• 17501-1-06 • 17509-2-06• 17521-1 • 17529-2

By taking this step, we will reduce the frequency of switch problems in the field by offering onlythe current limit model. No increase in price will be realized.

As inventory is depleted, (current estimate is July/August 1997), PHD will automatically convertorders to the corresponding switches with current limiting.

FILE UNDER SWITCHES/SENSORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER

REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 2/13/98 PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHES & SENSORSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: CN03-6

Inform any existing CN03-6 users of this change.


CN03-6 Switch Elimination

Phd will cease manufacturing and sale of the CN03-6 proximity switch once current inventory isdepleted. This is projected to occur by late summer of this year.

Alternatives

PHD recommends using the Series 1750, 1590, or AN12-6 normally open switches in place ofthe CN03-6.

The CN03-6 switch was designed to be wired either normally open or normally closed to supportthe common practice of wiring directly to valves years ago. With today’s PLC software and I/Otechnology, software changes can easily be done to accomodate the normally open PHDswitches listed above.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 3/9/98 PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 6250

None


Marks on Series 6250 Switches

Currently, PHD advertises the CE mark in association with our new Series 6250 Switches onpage 8-13 in Catalog 98. The CE mark (stands for Conformite Europeene) is used to indicate themarked product meets relevant requirements adopted by the European Council.

Due to unanticipated delays in processing our application, the Series 6250 Switches arecurrently unable to officially carry the CE marks. PHD fully anticipates this occurring by the endof June 1998. Until this time, PHD Customer Service will be qualifying each order received forthese switches as to whether the CE mark was crucial in the customer's purchasing decision.

FILE UNDER SWITCHES AND SENSORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER

REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 7/10/98 PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHES AND SENSORSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SEE BELOW

Inform customers who require this certification.


Certification

Effective June 1, 1998 PHD has received notification of acceptance that the majority of PHD'sproximity switch product line has qualified to carry the CE mark. The CE mark (stands forConformite Europeene) is used to indicate the marked product meets relevant requirementsadopted by the European Council. Following is a complete listing of PHD switches that will carrythe CE mark.

TYPE: 15901-1 53602-2yy 53606-1-yy 62505-1-yy15902-1 53622-2 53626-1 62515-117502-1-xx 53603-1-yy 55802-1-yy 62506-1-yy17522-1 53623-1 55822-1 62516-117503-1-xx 53604-1-yy 55803-1-yy 62507-1-yy*17523-1 53624-1 55823-1 62517-1*17504-1-xx 53605-1-yy 55804-1-yy17524-1 53625-1 55824-1

*Applicable for 10 to 30 VDC operation only. xx is cable length (in feet)yy is cable length (in meters)

FILE UNDER SWITCHES AND SENSORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER

REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 9/23/98 PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHES AND SENSORSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 5360, 5580, and 1750 switches

Inform future users of the revision.


Revision to Male Quick ConnectPHD’s supplier of 8mm push-in male quick connect (available on the 1750, 5360, and 5580series switches) has notified us of impending changes. A more versatile dual purpose connectorwill be made available in the near future not only with the current push-in feature, but also withintegral threads which creates a watertight connection.

When using the push-in feature only, the connector is compatible with the existing 17533-00-02(2 meter long) and 17533-00-05 (5 meter long) PHD female cordsets. In this situation, the matingelectrical connection is rated for an IP65 protection class against dust ingress and direct waterspray contact. Alternatively, when used with the proper “locking nut” style female cordset, themating electrical connection is rated for an IP68 protection class against immersion in liquid.Currently PHD does not offer this particular cordset, but plans to in the near future.

There will be no effect in function, however, there is a slight dimensional change as a result ofthe threads being added. The new style will be provided in orders as inventory of the currentstyle is depleted. This will occur over the next 1 to 3 months.

4° TYP

LED INDICATOR

4.000[101.6]

Ø .134 [3.40]

(5.590 [142])Ø.200 [5.1]

1.000 [25.4]

.293[7.4]

.320[8.1]

.150[3.8]

.295[7.5]

.445[11.3]

[M8x1]

1750 HALL EFFECT1750 REED4° TYP

.473[12.0]

LED INDICATOR

.028 [.71]

4.000[101.6]

Ø .134 [3.40]

Ø.200 [5.1]

1.000 [25.4]

.293[7.4]

.320[8.1]

.178[4.52]

.323[8.2]

(5.590 [142])

[M8x1]

5360 HALL EFFECT AND MAGNETORESISTIVE

[M8x1]

CABLE x Ø .134 [3.40]

4.000[102.0] .290

[7.4].700 [17.8].126

[3.2].325[8.3]

.061[1.5]

.460[11.7]

.150[3.8]

.320[8.1]

(5.590 [142])

.580[14.7]

5360 REED[M8x1]

CABLE x Ø .134 [3.40]

4.000[102.0] A

B.126[3.2]

.325[8.3]

.061[1.5]

.460[11.7]

.150[3.8]

.320[8.1]

(5.590 [142])

.580[14.7] LETTER DIM.

A B53602-2 & 53622-253609-2 & 53629-2

.685 [17.4]

.895 [22.7]

MODEL NO.1.090 [27.7]1.300 [33]

5580 REED AND HALL EFFECT

[M8x1]

CABLE x Ø .134 [3.40]

4.000[102.0]

1.180 [30.0](5.550 [141])

.236 [6.0] SQ


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 12-3-99 PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: MODEL 17000-xx-5 BRACKET

Inform customer as necessary of this product innovation and transition period.


NEW STYLE SWITCH BRACKETS FOR USE WITH THE SERIES 1750 SWITCHESAs part of PHD’s continual product improvement, PHD has introduced a more adaptable switchbracket. This bracket includes an integral cable strain relief and is manufactured from durable plastic.The new design bracket is available in four (4) sizes for use on 3/4", 1", 1-1/8", 1-3/8", Series AV,Series HV cylinders and associated powered slides.

The four new plastic brackets are completely interchangeable with the eight metal brackets theyreplace.

This enhanced bracket is currently being phased into inventory as a running change. The completetransition is estimated to be complete by Spring of 2000.

AFFECTED BRACKETS

OLD BRACKET

17000-31-017000-32-017000-33-017000-34-017000-31-917000-32-917000-33-917000-34-9

NEW BRACKET

17000-31-517000-32-517000-33-517000-34-517000-31-517000-32-517000-33-517000-34-5

SWITCH BRACKET DOES NOTEXTEND BEYOND CYLINDER

OUTLINE ON THIS SIDE

.144 [3.7] MAX

.429 [10.9] MAX

1.000[25.4] LED INDICATOR

7.00[17.8]


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 6-9-00 PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 63549 CORDSETS

Inform customers as required of this transition.


63549-xx CORDSETSOn approximately 5/10/00, PHD began substituting Series 63549-05 threaded quick connectcordsets for the previous 17533-00-05 on Series 5360 and 5580 switches. Previously, this cordsetwas available only on the Series 1750 switches. Based on current inventory, 63549-02 cordsets willreplace 17533-00-02 around 7/1/00. Below is a comparison between the cordsets.

Note: Pre-June '98 switches should not be used with the new 63549 cordset as there is minimumretention using this combination. In the rare situation where your customer needs to replace acordset used with a pre-June switch, PHD will replace the switch on a no-charge basis.

CORDSETS

PVC

GRAY

.134"

SAME

JACKET MATERIAL

JACKET COLOR

JACKET DIAMETER

PRICE

“OLD” SERIES 17533CORDSETS

PUR (poly-urethane)

BLACK

.177"

SAME

“NEW” SERIES 63549COMMENTS

Poly-urethane has become more desirable in the industryWe will now have some switches with gray pigtails and somewith black. All cordsets will be black.Some new switch and cordset combinations might not fitthrough previously designed cable routings. Rare instances

63549-xx CORDSETS WITH FEMALE QUICK CONNECT

MODEL NO. L78.74[2 m]

196.85[5 m]

LETTER DIM.

63549-02

63549-05

PIN 2/4WIRE COLOR

BLACK

BLACK CABLE

PIN 3WIRE COLORBLUE L

1.299[34.8]

Ø .402[10.2]

.689[19.3]

BLACK CONNECTORPIN 1WIRE COLORBROWN

Ø .177 [4.5]

FILE UNDER SWITCHES & SENSORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER

REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 2-24-03 PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 5360

Communicate this bulletin to your customers who use these switches.


INCORRECT WIRING SCHEMATIC LABELIt has been discovered that the wiring schematic labels, which are attached to the lead cable of the followingswitches, were incorrectly printed.

53603-1-0253603-1-0553623-1

This affects the above switches with the date codes of 111 - 301 (November 2001 - January 2003). The wiringschematic is correct however in Catalog 2003 as well as the packer, which is included in each switchshipment. Identifiable problems have been minimal as most users rely principally on the packer for referencewhen installing the switches.

As of February 14, 2003, all labels have been corrected. Below is a drawing of the previously incorrect labelsand the correct labels for reference.

6441-432

®

PART NO. 53603-1-02 AND 53623 (SINK - NPN)INPUT - 4.5-24 VDCLOAD - 200 mA MAX.

FT. WAYNE, IN USA

BLACK LOAD

DC

DC

3

1

2/4

BLUE

BROWN

PIN 2/4

PIN 3

PIN 1

LOAD

DC

DC

53603-1-02 WITH 2 METER CABLE

HALL

SWIT

CH

53623 WITH QUICK CONNECT

HALL

SWIT

CH

6441-433®

MODEL NO. 53603-1-05 (SINK-NPN)INPUT - 4.5-24 VDCLOAD - 20mA MAX.

BLACK LOAD

DC

DCBLUE

BROWN

HALL

SWIT

CH

®®

INCORRECT LABELS

CORRECT LABELS

FILE UNDER SWITCHES & SENSORS IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER

REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 6-4-03 PRODUCT TYPE: SWITCHESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 17000-xx-0 Brackets

Communicate this bulletin to your customers who have requested these metal brackets.


Metal Proximity Switch Mounting BracketsFor Use With Series 1750 Switches

Due to market demand, PHD will again make available the 17000-31-0 through -34-0 metal switchmounting brackets in addition to the plastic composite brackets currently cataloged. For clarification,there are no fundamental performance issues with the plastic brackets. However, there are certaincustomers who simply prefer and want the metal brackets. PHD does not plan on cataloging themetal brackets. However, for those customers who demand to purchase the metal brackets, they areavailable as a standard order item. PHD will be stocking these brackets. Contact PHD CustomerService for large quantity delivery information.

Part Numbers List Price17000-31-0 $12.7517000-32-0 $12.7517000-33-0 $12.7517000-34-0 $12.75

-31-0 thru -34-0 Brackets

.500 [12.7] MAX

.137 [3.5] MAX

OPTIONAL:CABLE STRAIN RELIEF BRACKET

SWITCH BRACKET DOES NOT EXTEND BEYONDCYLINDER OUTLINE ON THIS SIDE

1.000[25.4]LED INDICATOR

.690[17.5] SERIES

1000 & 20003000 & 4000

ROTARY SECTION17000-32-017000-34-0

DESCRIPTIONStrain Relief Kit for use withCompact Switch Brackets

PART NO.17494

COMPACT SWITCH

STRAIN RELIEF KITS

ROTARY & MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS

NPG

METRIC1925293529

COMPACT SWITCH17000-31-017000-32-017000-33-017000-34-017000-33-0

AV & HV

SERIES

CYLINDERSBORE SIZE

IMPERIAL3/41

1-1/81-3/81-1/8

FILE UNDER AUTOMATION HARDWARE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER

REQUIRED ACTION:

TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: A1

DATE: 4-3-91 PRODUCT TYPE: ADAPTORSPAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: MINIATURE ADAPTORS

All Miniature Adaptors will now have a keyway added to the rod or shaft mounting diameter. Thiswas done due to customer demand or suggestion, because they would like to have a keyedorientation for lineup purposes, and to help keep the Adaptor tight on the shaft.

Catalog 91 contains this new feature on Dimensional Page 8-11.

None.

BEFORE NOW


DIMENSIONS: MINIATURE ADAPTORS



REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 4-24-91 PRODUCT TYPE: AUTOMATION HARDWAREPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: TRANSITION PLATES

All Transition Plates have been or will be changed to have clear anodized aluminum instead of blackanodized aluminum. This was done to provide a more aesthetically pleasing look that will blend withadditional machining done to the plate instead of showing contrasts as on earlier produced transitionplates.

Changes began in January of 1991 and will be completed as stock runs out.



REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 2-15-92 PRODUCT TYPE: TRANSITION PLATES, ADAPTORSPAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL

Inform your customers who use adaptors and transition plates of this finish change.


New Finish on Adaptors and Transition PlatesStarting immediately, PHD will be phasing in a new finish on all hub adaptors, miniature adaptors,and transition plates. The new vibratory polished finish is the same finish our customers areaccustomed to on PHD Reed and Hall Switch Brackets. This process provides a very high polishedappearance.

The current clear or black anodized finish will be phased out as new stock comes in. The new finishwill be more consistent because many of the drilled holes on the black plates are aluminum in color.

For those customers who must have an anodized finish, PHD will offer anodizing as an option. (Seepage 2 for option call outs.) All future orders not specified for anodize will receive the new vibratorypolished finish as the older anodized stock is phased out. Consult PHD for anodized pricing. Seepage 2 for ordering information for anodized models.

MINIATURE ADAPTORSConsult Factory for ordering and pricingMiniature Adaptors with anodizing.



DATE: 2-15-92 PRODUCT TYPE: TRANSITION PLATES, ADAPTORSPAGE 2 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL


New Finish on Adaptors and Transition Plates

HUB ADAPTORSTo order, specify Adaptor Number, Hole Pattern Orientation Number. (Hub Adaptor Kit includes all hardware to mount Component to Hub, and Hub to Shaft.)Reference Section 8 Catalog 91

TRANSITION PLATESTo order, specify Primary Unit Number, Secondary Unit Number and Mounting Position.Reference Section 8 Catalog 91

1T -

SECONDARY UNIT

4 Digit Unit Number

-0 6 1 T 0 3 1

PRIMARY UNIT

4 Digit Unit Number 1 - Mounting Position 1, Polished Aluminum Finish2 - Mounting Position 2, Polished Aluminum Finish3 - Mounting Position 3, Polished Aluminum Finish4 - Mounting Position 4, Polished Aluminum Finish5 - Mounting Position 1, Anodized Finish6 - Mounting Position 2, Anodized Finish7 - Mounting Position 3, Anodized Finish8 - Mounting Position 4, Anodized Finish

10812 00HOLE PATTERN

-

ADAPTOR NUMBER

Select proper numberfrom the Matrix.

-

Relationship of the hole pattern centerline to centerlineof the keyway. The pattern may be rotated clockwisein 5° increments.-00 Hole pattern centerline is the same as the keyway-01 Hole pattern centerline, 5° clockwise of keyway-02 Hole pattern centerline, 10° clockwise of keyway

051

1 - Polished Aluminum Finish3 - Anodized Aluminum Finish

MOUNTING POSITION


REQUIRED ACTION:Call PHD whenever the need arises for non-cataloged transition plates, hub adaptors, or miniatureadaptors.



DATE: 7-6-92 PRODUCT TYPE: AUTOMATION HARDWAREPAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: HUB ADAPTORS, MINIATURE ADAPTORS,

AND TRANSITION PLATES

The PHD Catalog 91 shows a wide range of adaptors and transition plates, but does not cover manyof the newer PHD products. PHD does, however, offer these adaptors and plates for bolting thesenew products together with other PHD products. It would be difficult and confusing to list all of thepossible combinations on this Technical Data Bulletin. Listed on page two of this bulletin areproducts which are not covered in Section 8 of Catalog 91, but now have adaptors and transitionplates available.

Call PHD for specific hardware model number, dimensions, price, and availability.

New Adaptors and Transition Plates For New Products

FILE UNDER AUTOMATION HARDWARE IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDERPHD, Inc. • 9009 Clubridge Drive, P.O. Box 9070, Fort Wayne, IN 46899 U.S.A. • Phone (219) 747-6151 • Fax (219) 747-6754


DATE: 7-6-92 PRODUCT TYPE: AUTOMATION HARDWAREPAGE 2 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: HUB ADAPTORS, MINIATURE ADAPTORS,

AND TRANSITION PLATES

New Adaptors and Transition Plates For New Products

ESCAPEMENTSModel Transition Plate Code16010 ...................... 601016011 ...................... 601116020 ...................... 602016021 ...................... 6021

ROTARY ACTUATORSModel Transition Plate Code7-8000 .................... R800

SLIDESModel Transition Plate CodeBx03x ..................... B031Bx10x ..................... B101Bx12x ..................... B121CxU03x ................... C031CxU04x ................... C041CxU06x ................... C061Exx04x .................... E041Exx06x .................... E061NAV 3/4 Bore ......... N034NAV 1-1/8 Bore ...... N118SA01x ..................... SA12SA02x ..................... SA22SA03x ..................... SA32SA04x ..................... SA42SA06x ..................... SA62SB01x ..................... SB12SB02x ..................... SB22SB03x ..................... SB32SB04x ..................... SB42SB06x ..................... SB62Tx082 ...................... T082

GRIPPERSModel Transition Plate CodeAll Series 190 .................... 9060Example: 19060-1-4002 = 9060

Model Transition Plate CodeAll GRB & GRC .......... See ExamplesExamples: GRB121-1-5401 = GB12

GRC132-1-5001 = GC13


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 8-16-93 PRODUCT TYPE: STANCHIONPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: 13210-1-x-xx & 13220-1-x-xx

None required unless questioned by customer.


PHD Catalog `93 calls out the through hole diameter on 1" stanchion shafts at .625". This thru holediameter is actually .687".

Stanchion Shaft Thru Hole Clarification

Since the thru hole size is larger than cataloged, this should not cause any major problems.

MODEL 13210-1 MODEL 13220-1

.687 DIATHRU

.687 DIATHRU

TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U1DATE: 4-3-91 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS

MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS

SLIDES

PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL CYLINDERS

ALL MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS

N, T, R, B, AND U SLIDES

FILE UNDER COMMON/UNIVERSAL IN YOUR PHD TECHNICAL DATA BINDER

REQUIRED ACTION:Use this feature as a selling point when presenting PHD Cylinders, Multi-Motion Actuators, andPowered Slides.

FOUR WRENCH FLATS

All PHD Cylinders, Multi-motion Actuators, and Slides that incorporate Cylinders now contain 4wrench flats on the piston rod. This applies to any rod end which formerly had only 2 wrench flats.

This change was made to make it easier to hold onto the rod regardless of its orientation. It helps inthe attachment of tooling and can be accessed much better in confined areas.

This is called out starting in catalog 91. The change went into effect on products in October of 1990.



REQUIRED ACTION:

TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U2

DATE: 4-3-91 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS,ROTARY ACTUATORS,MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS

PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: TANDEM

Notify customers with tandems of this improvement.

The 1/4" tubing between the reservoir and the actuator was changed from vinyl to urethane. Thevinyl tubing became brittle with age. Urethane tubing remains flexible and clear. This change waseffective June 7, 1989 on all tandem products.



REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 4-4-91 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS,ROTARY ACTUATORS,MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS,SLIDES,GRIPPERS,ESCAPEMENTS

PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL

Check with any customers with low temperature applications and make them aware of the -20° Fminimum temperature limit.

Temperature ratings for seals in PHD products have been published as -40° to 180° F. We havefound that our standard seals do not perform well below -20° F. Therefore all actuators are nowrated from -20° to 180° F. Special seals can extend this range and we will look at these on an appli-cation by application basis.



REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 5-16-91 PRODUCT TYPE: ALLPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL

PHD has improved cushion and port control ball check retainer seals for all PHD products.In the past all ball check retainers used a lead gasket to seal between the retainer and the heador cap. Retainers on these units now use an 'O' ring type seal. This change went into effect inJune of 1990. Seal kits contain both types of seals with instructions on use and installation.Some older models will not seal properly with the 'O' ring. The lead gasket may be substituted inthese cases.

None.


Ball Retainer Assembly

With "O" Ring With Gasket


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 5-16-91 PRODUCT TYPE: ALL PRODUCTSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL SERIES

Electroless Nickel PlatingFor years PHD has offered nickel chrome plating as an option on many of our products for corrosionresistance and for food/washdown applications. This plating has always been difficult to work withand inconsistent at best.

We are now recommending that Electroless Nickel Plating be used in place of nickel chrome on allfuture orders. We will be calling the distributor whenever we receive any order with the 'Z' nickelchrome option. Advantages for this changeover are:

• A more consistent plating throughout all areas of the unit• Rated at approximately 50 hours of salt spray• Shorter deliveries than nickel chrome• Lower cost than nickel chrome (Consult PHD for new pricing for nickel chrome 'Z' option)

Electroless Nickel Plating will be designated as a 'Z1' option. Price will be the same as the past 'Z'nickel chrome option.

Recommend electroless nickel plating for all future washdown and corrosion resistant applications.


DATE: 10-1-91 PRODUCT TYPE: TOM THUMB CYLINDERSESCAPEMENTSROTARY ACTUATORSMULTI-MOTION ACTUATORSSLIDES

PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SEE LIST BELOW


REQUIRED ACTION:Inform your customers of the improved adjustability of PHD built-in Port Controls.



Improved Port Control® Design

Improvements have been made to Port Controls on some products (see list below) to improveadjustability and the ability to fine tune the cylinder or actuator speed. The Port Control needles nowhave a much finer pitch of 72 threads per inch compared to the old design which had 40 threads perinch. In the future we will be looking at upgrading the Port Control design on other products.

Products With Improved Port Control ® Design Effective DateSeries A, AV, HV; 3/4" Bore Cylinders ........................................................... March 1, 1992Series A, AV, HV; 1 and 1-1/8" Bore Cylinders .............................................. August 15, 1991Series NP, NH; 1-1/8 and 1-3/8" Bore Non-Rotating Rod Cylinders .............. August 15, 1991018075 Miniature Rotary Actuators ................................................................ August 15, 1991MA and MT Miniature Multi-Motion Actuators (Rotary Section) ..................... August 15, 1991Series 1000 and 2000 Rotary Actuators (Except Tandem Models) ............... August 15, 1991Series 1000 and 2000 Multi-Motion Actuators(Rotary Section, Except Tandem Models) ...................................................... August 15, 1991All Series Z Escapements .............................................................................. August 15, 1991Series R, T, U, B, and N Slides, Size 031 ...................................................... March 1, 1992Series R, T, U, B, and N Slides, Size 041 ...................................................... August 15, 1991

All future Repair Kits will include this improved design.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 10-1-91 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS/ROTARY ACTUATORSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: PNEUMATIC AND HYDRAULIC

Notify customers who may have had this problem in the past.


The cushion and Port Control® springs in the following units were changed to heavier springs inJuly 1989:

Series EA and NEHG, 1-3/8" bore CylindersSeries NEAG and NEHG, 1-3/8" bore CylindersSeries A, AV, and HV, 1-3/8" bore Medium Duty CylindersSeries EA and EH, 1-1/8" bore CylindersSeries NEAG and NEHG, 1-1/8" bore Cylinders3 through 6000 RXXA and RXXH Rotary Actuators2000 RX3R Tandem Rotary Actuators

This change was required because of spring failures in hydraulic applications involving pressurespikes, and in some pneumatic applications with high speed cycling. In those applications the springdeformed around the ball; sometimes even breaking apart and being pulled into the cylinder bore.The new robust spring has a larger wire diameter and two inactive coils on each end to bettersupport the ball.

New Cushion and Port Control® Springs


REQUIRED ACTION:Use this Technical Data Bulletin as a reference for pressure ratings on future hydraulic/magneticpiston units.


TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U9DATE: 1-15-92 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS

ROTARY ACTUATORSMULT-MOTION ACTUATORS

PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: HYDRAULIC UNITS WITH MAGNETIC PISTONS

UNIT DESCRIPTION MAX. OPERATING PRESSURE WITH“–E” OR “–M” MAGNETIC PISTON OPTION

3/4", 1-1/8", 1-3/8" EH, ES, NEHG CYLINDERS 1500 PSI

2" NEHG CYLINDERS 1100 PSI

3" NEHG CYLINDERS 500 PSI

SERIES 5/6000 ROTARY ACTUATORS 1100 PSI

SERIES 7/8000 ROTARY ACTUATORS 500 PSI

SERIES 5/6000 MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS 1100 PSI

SERIES 7/8000 MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS 500 PSI

Hydraulic Pressure Ratings With Magnetic Pistons

For years PHD has built hydraulic actuators with either the “–M” or “–E” magnetic piston option. Thisrequires the maximum working pressure of some actuators to be decreased because aluminum orbrass tubes are required with magnetic piston options. The chart below lists the maximum hydraulicworking pressures for these units.

See current catalog for standard working pressure ratings and other pressure limitations.


REQUIRED ACTION:Inform your customers of the improved adjustability of PHD built-in Port Controls.



DATE: 1-15-93 PRODUCT TYPE: HEAVY DUTY CYLINDERSNON-ROTATING ROD CYLINDERS

MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS

PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SEE LIST BELOW

Improved Port Control® DesignImprovements have been made to Port Controls on the following list of products. This changeimproved the ability to fine tune the cylinder or actuator speed. These port control needles now havea much finer pitch of 72 threads per inch compared to the old design with 40 threads per inch. Theseimproved port controls were phased in during 1992 with the last units changing over by September of1992.

This completes a change over of all PHD products to this improved design.

All Series E and NE Cylinders.All linear sections of Series 1-4000 Multi-Motion Actuators.All linear sections of Miniature Multi-Motion Actuators.

See Technical Data Bulletin C/U7 for information on other products with improved Port Controls.


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 6-11-93 PRODUCT TYPE: ALL PRODUCTSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL PNEUMATIC UNITS

No action required.


Non-Lubricated Air vs. Dry AirThis Technical Bulletin is written to clarify the use of PHD Pneumatic Cylinders and Actuators withnon-lubricated air. Unless otherwise stated, PHD products are lubricated for use with non-lubricatedair.

Units specified for “dry air” may have special requirements including a dry film lubrication orcleanroom specifications. These “dry air” service applications can be accomplished by PHD’sCustom Products Group.

Catalog '93 now specifies “for use with non-lubricated air.”


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 6-11-93 PRODUCT TYPE: ALL PRODUCTSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL

No action required.


Temperature LimitsMost standard PHD Actuators are rated for temperature limits between -20° to 180°F. Through theuse of -V Viton seal option, the temperature limit could be raised to 400°F. Listed below are theexceptions to the 400°F maximum temperature limit on units with Viton seals:

1) Rotary and MMA units 250 degs. ****2) Slides: Series T, B, U, R 180 degs. **

Series M, N, SD/SE 400 degs. Series S, SA/SB 180 degs. * Series C and E N/A

3) Grippers: 8600, 7900, and 15300 400 degs. 8400 250 degs. *** 19000 180 degs. * GRB 180 degs. * GRC 400 degs.

4) Options: All units with magnets or hall sensors -M, -E, -J, -H, etc. 180 degs.

All units with shock pads or bumpers -B, -BR, -BC, etc. 180 degs.

* = Temp rating due to Shock Pads** = Temp rating due to Thomson Bearings*** = Temp rating due to Delrin Bearings**** = Temp rating due to Rotary Bearings



DATE: 6-11-93 PRODUCT TYPE: ALL PRODUCTSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: ALL


Chemicals Listed as Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS)PHD is in compliance with government regulations on ODS. As a result, PHD is not required to labelany of our products based on the final ruling published in the February 11, 1993 Federal Register.

In part it states that if your product(s) touch an ODS, you have to label them. If you do not useODS’s and incorporate products that have touched ODS’s, you do not have to label your product(s).

The following are excerpts from the final rule:“Manufactured with a controlled substance means that the manufacturer of the product itself useda controlled substance directly in the product’s manufacturing, but the product itself does notcontain the controlled substance at the point of introduction into interstate commerce. Thefollowing situations are excluded from the meaning of the phrase ‘manufactured with’ a controlledsubstance:(1) Where a product has not had physical contact with the controlled substance; . . .” 40 CFR 82.104(m)

That contact would have to follow conditions outlined in the Final Rule. Also note that:“Each manufacturer or importer of a product incorporating another product to which§82.102(a)(3), or, (b)(2) applies, that is purchased from another manufacturer or supplier, is notrequired to pass through and incorporate the labeling information that accompanies such

incorporated product in a warning statement accompanying the manufacturer’s or importer’sfinished product.” 40 CFR 82.116(a)

Since manufacturers do not have to pass through labeling, independent investigation of upstreamsuppliers is no longer necessary.

Another section specifies duties of distributors and wholesalers, including:“(a)Requirement of compliance by wholesalers, distributors and retailers. All wholesalers,distributors and retailers of products or containers to which this subpart applies are required topass through the labeling information that accompanies the product.(b)Reliance on reasonable belief. The wholesaler, distributor or retailer of a product may rely onthe labeling information that it receives with the product or container, and is not required toindependently investigate whether the requirements of this subpart are applicable to the productor container, as long as the wholesaler, distributor or retailer reasonably believes that thesupplier of the product or container is reliably and accurately complying with the requirements ofthis subpart. 40 CFR 82.118

REQUIRED ACTION:No action required.


REQUIRED ACTION:

TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: C/U 14

DATE: 7-1-96 PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORSMULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS

PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES 7000 & 8000

None


Spiralox Retaining Rings on Series 7000 & 8000 Rotary Actuators and Multi-Motion ActuatorsWhen current stock is depleted, PHD will begin replacing the current Truarc (pt.# 1987-009) bearingretaining rings with a Spiralox (pt.# 1980-657) ring. This change affects only the Series 7000 & 8000Rotary Actuators and Multi-Motion Actuators. Future parts list will reflect this change.

Replacing Truarc type bearingretaining ring with Spiralox onSeries 7000 & 8000 Rotary Actuatorsand Multi-Motion Actuators

•


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 9-20-01 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS, SLIDES, MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS

PAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: VARIOUS

Notify effected customers of this improvement.


Seal Specification Change

On May 17, 2001, PHD Inc. mailed a letter of notification to all PHD Distributors regarding potential prematureseal failure problems on certain Series AV Cylinders. As stated in this letter, PHD was in process of changingthe seal specification to a wax-filled carboxylated nitrile seal. Subsequent testing has proven such favorableresults, PHD has widened the scope of products to use this new seal. Effective September 2001 all shipmentsof the following products will use the new wax-filled carboxylated nitrile seal:

PISTON BORE / SIZE SLIDE / SERIES SEALS CHANGED3/4" A, AV, HV Piston and Rod Seals3/4" EA, EL, EH, ES Piston and Rod Seals3/4" NPG, NHG Piston and Rod Seals3/4" NA, NAV, NHV, NTD Piston and Rod SealsSize 22 SD / SE Piston and Rod SealsSize 51 SK / SL ( LSV Design ) Piston Seals OnlySize 03x TS, TH, TT Piston and Rod SealsSize 03x RS, RH, RT Piston and Rod SealsSize 03x BS, BH, BT Piston and Rod SealsSize 11, 51 SG ( LSV Design ) Piston Seals OnlySize 03 MS, MT Piston and Rod Seals3/4" MA1, MH1 Linear Section Only Piston and Rod Seals

PISTON BORE / SIZE SLIDE / SERIES SEALS CHANGED1" A, AV, HV Piston and Rod SealsSize 23 SD / SE Piston and Rod SealsSize 52 SK / SL ( LSV Design ) Piston Seals OnlySize 12, 52 SG ( LSV Design ) Piston Seals OnlySize 04 MS, MT Piston and Rod Seals

PISTON BORE / SIZE SLIDE / SERIES SEALS CHANGED1 1/8" A, AV, HV Piston and Rod Seals1 1/8" EA, EL, EH, ES Piston and Rod Seals1 1/8" NPG, NHG Piston and Rod Seals1 1/8" NEAG, NEHG Piston and Rod Seals1 1/8" NA, NAV, NHV, NTD Piston and Rod Seals



DATE: 9-20-01 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS, SLIDES, MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS

PAGE 2 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: VARIOUS


PISTON BORE / SIZE SLIDE / SERIES SEALS CHANGEDSize 24 SD / SE Piston and Rod SealsSize 53 SK / SL ( LSV Design ) Piston and Rod SealsSize 04x TS, TH, TT Piston and Rod SealsSize 04x RS, RH, RT Piston and Rod SealsSize 04x BS, BH, BT Piston and Rod SealsSize 13, 53 SG ( LSV Design ) Piston and Rod Seals1000 / 2000 MMA, MMH Linear Section Only Piston and Rod Seals

PISTON BORE / SIZE SLIDE / SERIES SEALS CHANGED1 3/8" A, AV, HV Piston and Rod Seals1 3/8" EA, EL, EH, ES Piston and Rod Seals1 3/8" NPG, NHG Piston and Rod Seals1 3/8" NEAG, NEHG Piston and Rod SealsSize 25 SD / SE Piston and Rod SealsSize 06x TS, TH, TT Piston and Rod SealsSize 06x RS, RH, RT Piston and Rod SealsSize 06x BS, BH, BT Piston and Rod SealsSize 06 MS, MT Piston and Rod Seals3000 / 4000 MMA, MMH Linear Section Only Piston and Rod SealsSize 08x BS, BH, BT Piston and Rod SealsSize 08x RS, RH, RT Piston and Rod Seals

MISC. ITEMS SLIDE / SERIES SEALS CHANGEDSize 02x MS, MT Piston and Rod SealsSize 26 SD / SE Rod Seal OnlySize 02x SA / SB Rod Seal OnlySize 03x SA / SB Rod Seal Only


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 6-19-03 PRODUCT TYPE: MULTI-MOTION & ROTARY ACTUATORSPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: RxxH 5000 & 6000, MxxH 5000 & 6000

Ensure future customers are aware of this specification change.


HYDRAULIC PRESSURE RATING CHANGE ON SERIES 5000 & 6000MULTI-MOTION & ROTARY ACTUATORS

PHD, Inc. has determined it necessary to re-rate the maximum pressure rating of 2" bore rotary andmulti-motion actuators for hydraulic service. Below are the specification changes highlighted(shaded). These changes will appear in Catalog 2004.

RATINGSAll pneumatic rotary actuators have a maximum pressure rating of

150 psi [10 bar] air. Most hydraulic rotary actuators have a maximumpressure rating of 1500 psi [100 bar]. Except as noted in chart below.*

Minimum factor of safety at maximum rated hydraulic pressure foroutput shaft is 2:1, and for hydraulic chambers is 3:1. Consult PHD forproof pressure data.

NOTE: All maximum working pressures are based on non-shockhydraulic service and should not exceed the recommended ratings.

HYD OPTION psi [bar]SERIES *PLAIN -P -D -E OR -M

1000 — — — — — — — —2000 1000 [69] 750 [52] 750 [52] — —3000 — — — — — — — —4000 — — 750 [52] 750 [52] — —5000 — — — — — — 750 [52]6000 — — 750 [52] 750 [52] 750 [52]7000 — — — — — — 500 [35]8000 — — 750 [52] 750 [52] 500 [35]

Catalog 2003, Page 3C-29 Catalog 2003, Page 4A-22

RATINGSAll pneumatic multi-motion actuators have a maximum

pressure rating of 150 psi [10 bar] air.Most hydraulic multi-motion actuators* have a maximum

pressure rating of 1500 psi [100 bar].Pressure rating exceptions are as indicated.NOTE: All maximum working pressures are based on non-shock

hydraulic service and should not exceed the recommended ratings.

ROTARY SECTIONOPTION psi [bar]

SERIES PLAIN -P -D -E OR -M

1000— — — —— — — —

20001000 750 750 —[69] [52] [52] —

3000— — — —— — — —

4000— 750 750 —— [52] [52] —

5000— — — 750— — — [52]

6000— 750 750 750— [52] [52] [52]

7000— — — 500— — — [35]

8000— 750 750 500— [52] [52] [35]


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 1-25-05 PRODUCT TYPE: CATALOG 05 UPDATESPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: VARIOUS


Included are a number of changes for CATO5. Below is a list of affected pages and descriptions of changes. Changes are highlighted inyellow on the following six pages.

These changes have also been made to the online Catalog 2005.

PAGE SERIES/PRODUCT CHANGES AFFECT

1-45 CV Cylinders Mounting Accessory - Rectangular Flange Mounting Kit

5-61 Metric 1000-8000 Rotary Actuators Dimensional and Quick Reference charts

5-73 Metric Air/Oil Tandem Rotary Actuators Dimensional and Quick Reference charts

5-84 3 Position Rotary Actuators Dimensional and Quick Reference charts

5-85 Metric 3 Position Rotary Actuators Dimensional and Quick Reference charts

6-5 1000-8000 Multi-Motion Actuators Specifications chart

6-6 1000-8000 Multi-Motion Actuators Dimensional chart

6-7 Metric 1000-8000 Multi-Motion Actuators Dimensional chart

6-27 2000-8000 Multi-Position Multi-Motion Actuators Specifications chart

1-38 CV Cylinders -H47 Rodlok® option dimensions E & G3

2-68 SK/SL Slides -H47 Rodlok® option dimensions E & G3

2-85 SCV Slides -H47 Rodlok® option dimensions E & G3

2-119 SG Slides -H47 Rodlok® option dimensions E & G3

10-25 Transition Plate/Actuator Possible Combinations Plate Thicknesses for Series SFP Slide & Rotary Actuators

10-27 Transition Plate/Actuator Possible Combinations Plate Thicknesses for Series SFP Slide & Grippers

10-31 Transition Plate/Actuator Possible Combinations Plate Thicknesses for Series SFP Slide & other Slides

Make note of these corrections in your Catalog 05 for future orders.

Page 2 of 7TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN C/U CATALOG 05 UPDATES

2X HOLE THRU FORFB FASTENER

OPTIONAL M22JAM NUT

UF

TF

UR

ZB + STROKE

W MF

ZF + STROKEMF

±.055 [±1.4]

SERIES20002000400060008000

A158165203233283

B0.440.440.660.661.32

C7676

108127203

D515176

102127

E3838506376

CAPSTYLEPLAIN

-ABOTHBOTHBOTH

* BOTH IMPERIAL AND METRIC SHAFT OPTI (IMPERIAL SHAFT = DESIGN 8, AND METR NUMBERS FOR METRIC UNITS AND ARE IN

Page 1-45 Series CV Cylinder, Location of ZB + Stroke DimensionDimension ZB + Stroke is currently dimensioned to the edge of the cap, but should be dimensioned to the end of the boss hidden in theflange. This is similar to the detail for the 32 through 100 bores at the bottom of page 1-45.

RECTANGULAR FLANGE MOUNTING KITSIZES 20 & 25 mm (MF8 PER ISO 6432)

Page 5-61 Metric 1000-8000 Rotary Actuators, Changes to Dimensions Y & ZA and Quick Reference Note

SERIES1000 & 20001000 & 20003000 & 40005000 & 60007000 & 8000

CAPSTYLEPLAIN

-ABOTHBOTHBOTH

A145157201232309

B0.440.440.660.661.33

C7676108127203

W5 x 1.59 x 165 x 1.59 x 16

75 x 2.36 x 3835 x 3.18 x 3853 x 2.36 x 78

V12.00/11.9712.99/11.9722.00/21.9628.00/27.9644.00/43.96

W4 x 2.5 x 154 x 2.5 x 156 x 3.5 x 328 x 5 x 4012 x 5 x 56

Y7278100116154

Z0.220.220.330.330.66

ZA.029384873

L SHAFTS* METRIC SHAFTS*X

1/81/81/41/43/8

QUICK REFERENCE FOR: A + (T° x B)

SERIES*1000 & 20003000 & 40005000 & 60007000 & 8000

DEGREE OF ROTATION

*Add 6.3 to dimensions for each angle adjustment for Series 1000 & 2000 only.

45164.6230.5261.5368.3

90184.5260.2291.1427.7

180224.3319.7351.4548.0

270264.1379.1410.1665.5

360303.8438.6469.5784.4

450343.6498.0529.0903.2

CAPSTYLE

Page 5-73 Metric Air/Oil Tandem Rotary Actuators, Changes to Cap Style and Quick Reference Note

CAPSTYLEPLAIN

-ABOTHBOTHBOTH

QUICK REFERENCE FOR: A + (T° x B)DEGREE OF ROTATION

SERIES**2000

400060008000

45177.7232.6263.1342.1

90197.6262.2292.9401.5

180237.4321.7352.3520.4

270277.2381.2411.7639.3

360317.0440.6471.2758.1

450356.7500.0530.9877.0

**Add 6.3 to dimensions for each angle adjustment for Series2000 only.

OPTIONAL 4X FD SHCS

d1 HOLETHRU

TG1 SQ

Page 5-84 3 Position Rotary Actuators, Changes toQuick Reference Note


*Add .250 to dimensions for each angle adjustment for Series 2000 only.

456.4819.076

10.29614.500

907.264

10.24611.46616.840

1808.830

12.58613.80621.520

27010.39614.92616.14626.200

36011.96217.26618.48630.880

45013.52819.60620.82635.560

DEGREE OF ROTATIONSERIES*2000400060008000

Page 5-85 Metric 3 Position Rotary Actuators,Changes to Dimensions Y, Z, & ZA and QuickReference Note

XG1/8G1/8G1/4G1/4G3/8

Y7278100116154

Z0.220.220.330.330.66

ZA029384873

W5 x 1.59 x 165 x 1.59 x 165 x 2.36 x 385 x 3.18 x 383 x 2.36 x 78

V12.00/11.9712.00/11.9722.00/21.9628.00/27.9644.00/43.96

W4 x 2.5 x 154 x 2.5 x 156 x 3.5 x 328 x 5 x 4012 x 5 x 56

AFTS* METRIC SHAFTS*


45164.6230.5261.5368.3

90184.5260.2291.1427.7

180224.2319.8410.8539.6

270264.1379.1350.7546.6

360303.8438.6469.5784.4

450343.6498.0529.0903.2

*Add 6.3 to dimensions for each angle adjustment for Series 2000 only.

DEGREE OF ROTATIONSERIES*2000400060008000


Page 6-5 1000-8000 Multi-Motion Actuators, Change to Hydraulic Pressure Ratings for the Rotary Section,Series 5000 & 6000

SERIES10002000300040005000600070008000

OPTION psi [bar]PLAIN

—1000——————

psi bar—69——————

PORT CONTROLSpsi bar—

750—

750—

750—

750

—52—52—52—52

-Dxpsi bar—

750—

750—

750—

750

—52—52—52—52

-E or -Mpsi bar————

750750500500

————52523535

ROTARY SECTION

SERIES10002000300040005000600070008000


————————

psi bar————————

PORT CONTROLSpsi bar————N/AN/AN/AN/A

————N/AN/AN/AN/A

-Dxpsi bar————————

————————

-E or -Mpsi bar————

750750500500

————52523535

LINEAR SECTION

HYDRAULIC PRESSURE RATINGS FOR OPTIONS

Note: — = Standard Rating

Page 6-6 1000-8000 Multi-Motion Actuators, Changeto Plain & -A Cap Style, Series 1000 & 2000

SERIES2000

1000 & 20003000 & 40005000 & 60007000 & 8000

A5.6986.1987.9069.126

12.160

B.0174.0174.026.026.052

C3.0003.0004.2505.0008.000

D2.0002.0003.0004.0005.000

11223

CAPSTYLEPLAIN

-ABOTHBOTHBOTH

SERIES2000

1000 & 2000

Page 6-7 Metric 1000-8000 Multi-Motion Actuators,Change to Plain Cap Style, Series 2000

SERIES2000

1000 & 20003000 & 40005000 & 60007000 & 8000

A145157201232309

B0.440.440.660.661.33

C7676

108127203

D515176

102127

CAPSTYLEPLAIN

-ABOTHBOTHBOTH

SERIES2000

Page 6-27 2000-8000 Multi-Position Multi-Motion Actuators, Change to Hydraulic Pressure Ratings

*SEE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE RATINGS FOR OPTIONS CHART BELOW. ALL HYDRAULICRATINGS ARE BASED ON NON-SHOCK SERVICE.

SPECIFICATIONSPNEUMATIC OPERATING PRESSUREHYDRAULIC OPERATING PRESSURE*OPERATING TEMPERATUREROTATIONAL TOLERANCESTROKE TOLERANCEEND OF ROTATION BACKLASH

LUBRICATIONMAINTENANCE

SERIES 2000-800020 to 150 psi [1.4 to 10 bar]

40 to 1500 psi [2.8 to 103 bar]-20° to 180°F [-29° to 82°C]Nominal rotation +10° to -0°

±.031 [.8 mm]2° (2000), 1° 30' (4000)

1° 0' (6000), 0° 30' (8000)Factory lubricated for rated life

Field repairable

HYDRAULIC PRESSURE RATINGS FOR OPTIONSAll pneumatic actuators have a maximum pressure rating of

150 psi [10 bar] air. Most hydraulic actuators have a maximumpressure rating of 1500 psi [100 bar], except as noted in the chart.

HYDSERIES2000400060008000

OPTION psi [bar]-P -D

————

——

750500

-E or -M——

[52][35]

————

————

————

ROTARY SECTION

SERIES2000400060008000


––––

psi bar––––

PORT CONTROLSpsi bar––

N/AN/A

––

N/AN/A

-Dxpsi bar––––

––––

-E or -Mpsi bar––

750500

––

5235

LINEAR SECTION

NOTE: – = STANDARD RATING


Pages 1-38 Series CV Cylinders

M6 x 1 x 20M6 x 1

M5G 1/8

M6 x 1 x 20M6 x 1

M5G 1/8

M8 x 1.25 x 30M8 x 1.25

M6G 1/8

M8 x 1.25 x 30M8 x 1.25

M8G 1/8

M10 x 1.5 x 30M10 x 1.5

M8G 1/8

M10 x 1.5 x 30M10 x 1.5

M8G 1/8

M22 x 1.5

M4 x 0.7 x 20M4 x 0.7

—M5

M22 x 1.5

M4 x 0.7 x 20M4 x 0.7

—M5

A1A2A3A4BC

D1D2D3DKEF

F2G1G2G3H1L1L3L5L6L7L8

L10L11WH

LETTERDIM

BORE SIZE32 mm 50 mm 63 mm 80 mm 100 mm

in mm1.2801.575.165.630

1.8901.9691.181

——

.472

.984

.984

3.346.315.472

1.8902.2831.260.630.315

2.9131.024

40 mm

32.540.04.2

16.048.050.030.0——

12.025.025.0

85.08.0

12.048.058.032.016.08.0

74.026.0

1.4961.811.177.827

2.2052.2831.378

——

.6301.0241.142

3.839.394.472

2.1652.5591.398.768.394

3.3461.181

38.046.04.5

21.056.058.035.0——

16.026.029.0

97.510.012.055.065.035.519.510.085.030.0

1.8312.126.453.945

2.6772.7561.575

——

.7871.2601.378

4.626.591.630

2.7563.2281.929.827.472

4.2131.457

46.554.011.524.068.070.040.0——

20.032.035.0

117.515.016.070.082.049.021.012.0

107.037.0

2.2242.165.295

1.2603.2283.3461.772

——

.7871.5351.673

5.256.591.591

2.7563.2281.929.827.472

4.2131.457

56.555.07.5

32.082.085.045.0——

20.039.042.5

133.515.015.070.082.049.021.012.0

107.037.0

2.8352.756.394

1.7323.9374.1341.772

——

.9841.7322.067

6.752.630.630

3.5434.3312.4411.102.630

5.3541.811

72.070.010.044.0

100.0105.045.0——

25.044.052.5

171.516.016.090.0

110.062.028.016.0

136.046.0

89.070.010.060.0

120.0130.055.0——

25.049.065.0

189.016.018.092.0

115.065.027.016.0

143.051.0

3.5042.756.394

2.3624.7245.1182.165

——

.9841.9292.559

7.441.630.709

3.6224.5282.5591.063.630

5.6302.008

in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm20 mm

in mm1.024

———

1.4571.457.866

.590

.315

.787

.728

2.795.354.354

1.5752.2441.142.433—

2.520.945

26.0———

37.037.022.0

15.08.0

20.018.5

71.09.09.0

40.057.029.011.0—

64.024.0

25 mmin mm

1.063———

1.5751.575.866

.669

.394

.787

.787

2.854.315.315

1.7322.4801.220.512—

2.8351.102

27.0———

40.040.022.0

17.010.020.020.0

72.58.08.0

44.063.031.013.0—

72.028.0

Pages 2-68 Series SK/SL Slides

Pages 2-85 Series SCV Slides

Pages 2-119 Series SG Slides

0.787[20]

4.941[125.5]0.807[20.5]10-32[M5]1.555[39.5]1.575[40]

1.083[27.5]8.445

[214.5]

MODEL NUMBER

PHD BORE

B

E

G3

H

L5

L6

FF

LETTERDIM SGx22

0.984[25]

5.453[138.5]0.807[20.5]10-32[M5]1.457[37]

1.732[44]

1.398[35.5]9.075

[230.5]

SGx231.260[32]

6.732[171]0.984[25.0]

1/8[G 1/8]1.791[45.5]1.890[48]

1.614[41]

11.102[282]

SGx241.575[40]

7.382[187.5]1.091[27.7]

1/8[G 1/8]1.811[46]

2.165[55]

1.673[42.5]12.165[309]

SGx251.575[40]

7.382[187.5]1.091[27.7]

1/8[G 1/8]1.732[44]

2.165[55]

1.673[42.5]12.165[309]

SGx26

NOTES:1) L5 Dim is the amount added to the standard unit for the H47 option2) Numbers in [ ] are for metric units and are in mm.

Changes to Rodlok® dimensions. The redesigned 32 mm bore Rodlok incorporates a larger piston and port in the lock. This increasesthe size of the unit (dim. E) and the port (dim. G3). Affects four pages: 1-38, 2-68, 2-85, and 2-119.

HE

G3L5L8AA

LETTERDIM

MODEL NUMBERSCVx2 SCVx4 SCVx5 SCVx6 SCVx7

in mm1.280.787

10-321.5750.5124.291

SCVx3

32.520.0M54013

109

SCVx8in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm

SCVx9

1.181.787

10-321.7320.5124.567

30.020.0M54413

116

1.339.9841/8

1.8900.6306.969

34.025.0G 1/8

4816

177

1.4761.0241/8

2.1650.7687.874

37.526.0G 1/8

5519.5200

1.8111.2601/8

2.7560.8278.858

46.032.0G 1/8

7021

225

1.8111.5351/8

2.7560.8279.449

46.039.0G 1/8

7021

240

2.5201.7321/8

3.5431.102

10.945

64.044.0G 1/8

9028

278

2.2241.9291/8

3.6221.063

1.1614

56.549.0G 1/8

9227

295

LETTERDIM.

HE

G3L5L8AA

MODEL NUMBERSxx72mm40.220.5M54013

156

Sxx74mm45.525.0G 1/8

4816

196

Sxx75mm44.027.7G 1/8

5519.5221

Sxx76mm56.032.7G 1/8

7021

248

Sxx73mm37.220.5M54413

169

Page 5 of 7TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN C/U

CATALOG 05 UPDATES

Pages 10-25 Transition Plate/Actuator Possible Combinations, Changes to Plate Thicknesses

UNITNO.

RAS125[RAS525]

NOTES:1) SHADED AREAS – CONSULT PHD FOR AVAILABILITY2) METRIC NUMBERS ARE IN [ ]3) RLS SHAFTS ARE NOT CENTERED ON ITS MOUNTING HOLE PATTERN.4) MODEL NUMBERS IN CHART ARE FOR REFERENCE, SEE CODE CHART

FOR ACTUAL ORDER CODE

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

4455

33597

455

597

55

77

66

8

334455

333597

334455

33597

334455

3597

34455

3597

4455

567

3344552333597

3344552333597

334455

333597

334455

33597

334455

3597

34455

3597

5555

597

5555

97

55

33567

6

35108

5108

3333

3335

33335

3355

33355

3555

3333

2333

3333

33353

33355

3353

PLATE THICKNESS KEY

12345

6789

10* = Numbers indicate the total thickness of two

plates, required due to design reasonsExample:9* = 1.000 total thickness of two .500 plates

SG21[SG61]

SERIESSG

SLIDES

SG22[SG62]

SG23[SG63]

SG24[SG64]

SG25[SG65]

SG26[SG66]

PRIMARY

UNIT

ROTARY ACTUATORSSECONDARY UNIT

R200[R205]

R400[R405]

R600[R605]

R800[R805]

RAS120[RAS520]

RAS132[RAS532]

RAS140[RAS540]

RAS150[RAS550]

RLS112[RLS512]

RLS116[RLS516]

RLS120[RLS520]

RLS125[RLS525]

RLS132[RLS532]

RLS140[RLS540]

RLS150[RLS550]

RLS163[RLS563] RIx25 RIx32 RIx50 RFS114

[RFS514]RFS120

[RFS520]RFS125

[RFS525]

SM108[SM508]

SM112[SM512]

SM116[SM516]

SM125[SM525]

SM132[SM532]

SERIESSM

SLIDES

SERIESSFP

SLIDES

SFP527

SFP540

RCCx112[RCCx512]

RCCx116[RCCx516]

RCCx108[RCCx508]

= .313 [7.9]

= .375 [9.5]

= .500 [12.7]

= .625 [15.9]

= .750 [19.0]

= 1.250 [31.8]

= 1.500 [38.1]

= 2.000 [50.8]

= 1.000 [25.4]

= 1.750 [44.5]

Page 6 of 7TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN C/U CATALOG 05 UPDATESPages 10-27 Transition Plate/Actuator Possible Combinations, Changes to Plate Thicknesses

UNITNO.

UNITNO.

NOTES:1) SHADED AREAS – CONSULT PHD FOR AVAILABILITY2) METRIC NUMBERS ARE IN [ ]3) MODEL NUMBERS IN CHART ARE FOR REFERENCE, SEE CODE CHART


PLATE THICKNESS KEY

12345

6789



223

233359

2233

233359

2233

33597

2233

3597

223

233359

2233

233359

2233

33597

333

3597

2233

33597

23334

3597

23334

3597

33345

577

445

33597

33334

3597

33345

3597

3445

7

223

2333597

2233

2333597

2233

333597

2233

3597

3333597

77

33355

333597

3355

33597

355

35

7

55

35

2222352333597

333335

333597

333335

33597

555555

3597

55

5

5

5

55

5

33359

333335

333597

333335

33597

555555

35

7

555

35

55

5

333355

333597

33355

3597

555

35

7

233359

355

5

7

55

5

7

**

**

* * **

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

** *

**

**

**

** *

* * **

** *

**

** * *

SERIESSG

SLIDESPRI

MARY

UNIT

SG21[SG61]

SG22[SG62]

SG23[SG63]

SG24[SG64]

SG25[SG65]

SG26[SG66]

SERIESSM

SLIDES

SM108[SM508]

SM112[SM512]

SM116[SM516]

SM125[SM525]

SM132[SM532]

SERIESSFP

SLIDES

SFP527

SFP540

SERIESSG

SLIDESPRI

MARY

UNIT

SG21[SG61]

SG22[SG62]

SG23[SG63]

SG24[SG64]

SG25[SG65]

SG26[SG66]

SERIESSM

SLIDES

SM108[SM508]

SM112[SM512]

SM116[SM516]

SM125[SM525]

SM132[SM532]

SERIESSFP

SLIDES

SFP527

SFP540

GRIPPERS

SECONDARY UNIT

8400 8410 8420 8430 9x6x 9x7x 9x8x 9x9x

GRBx3x

GRCx5x

GRBx4x

GRBx5x

GRBx6x

GRCx3x

GRCx4x

GRCx6x

GRDx3x

GRDx4x

GRDx5x

GRDx6x

GRBx2x

GRBx7x

GRIPPERS

SECONDARY UNIT

GRTx5

GRWx25

GRTx6

GRTx7

GRTx8

GRLx16

GRWx16

GRWx32

GRWx40

GRWx50

GRFxxx19

GRFxxx25

GRTx4

GRLx14

GRSx28

GRSx32

GRSx50

GRSx63

GRTx2

GRTx3

GRSx27

GRTx1

GRFxxx28

GRFxxx32

GRRx50

= .313 [7.9]

= .375 [9.5]

= .500 [12.7]

= .625 [15.9]

= .750 [19.0]

= 1.250 [31.8]

= 1.500 [38.1]

= 2.000 [50.8]

= 1.000 [25.4]

= 1.750 [44.5]

Page 7 of 7TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN C/U

CATALOG 05 UPDATES

Pages 10-31 Transition Plate/Actuator Possible Combinations, Changes to Plate Thicknesses

PLATE THICKNESS KEY

12345

6789



= .313 [7.9]

= .375 [9.5]

= .500 [12.7]

= .625 [15.9]

= .750 [19.0]

= 1.250 [31.8]

= 1.500 [38.1]

= 2.000 [50.8]

= 1.000 [25.4]

= 1.750 [44.5]

UNITNO.

SG21[SG61]

SG22[SG62]

SG23[SG63]

SG24[SG64]

SG25[SG65]

SG26[SG66]

SM108[SM508]

SM112[SM512]

SM116[SM516]

SM125[SM525]

SM132[SM532]

SFP527

SFP540

NOTES:1) SHADED AREAS – CONSULT PHD FOR AVAILABILITY2) METRIC NUMBERS ARE IN [ ]3) MODEL NUMBERS IN CHART ARE FOR REFERENCE, SEE CODE CHART


SFP527

SFP540

333455233353

333455

3353

333455

3535

4455

3535

333455

3353597

334455

3353597

4455

353597

455

53597

455

535

55

55577

333455

3353597

333455

353597

3455

355577

455

5

5

7

455

33353597

55

33552333535

355

33535

55

3535

333455

33353

333455

33535

444455

5555

55555

55

5

5555

5

666

5

66 6

333355233359

3

333355

33359

3

333355

3359

3

333355

33359

3

333355

359

3

333355233359

3

333355

33359

3

333355

3359

3

355

333535

55

3535

333355

3359

3**

**

**

**

**

**

**

**

** *

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

SAx108[SAx108]SBx108[SBx108]





SD22SE22

SD23SE23

SD24SE24

SD25SE25

SERIESSG

SLIDES

PRI

MARY

UNIT

SK71SL71

SK72SL72

SK73SL73

SK74SL74

SK75SL75

SK76SL76

SD26SE26

SCVx

12[S

CV52

]

SCVx

13[S

CV53

]

SCVx

14[S

CV54

]

SCVx

15[S

CV55

]

SCVx

16[S

CV56

]

SCVx

17[S

CV57

]

SCVx

18[S

CV58

]

SCVx

19[S

CV59

]

SHP1

08SH

P508

SHP1

12SH

P512

SHP1

16SH

P516

SERIESSM

SLIDES

SIP5

12

SIP5

16

SIP5

20

SJP5

08

SJP5

12

SJP5

16

STP1

08ST

P508

STP1

12ST

P512

STP1

16ST

P516

STP1

20ST

P520

STP1

25ST

P525

SERIES SFPSLIDES

Position #1

SERIES SFPSLIDES

Position #2

SLIDESSECONDARY UNIT


REQUIRED ACTION:

TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PPC1

DATE: 11-18-04 PRODUCT TYPE: PPC CYLINDERPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES BCZ NOZZLE CYLINDERS

Discuss actuation times with your customer, especially when they are not retrofitting an entire machine. If you currently haveactuators in the field running too fast, please contact PHD for a field retrofit orifice kit #75677. It may be necessary for you to adjustthe orifice size of the orifice disk to match your customer's specific speed requirement. You can easily drill an additional hole in thealuminum disk, opening the orifice diameter to increase the speed of the cylinder. Please reference the Cycle Extend Time vs.Orifice Area. Contact PHD if slower than standard stroke velocities are required.


Series BCZ nozzle cylinders with attached Mac 400 series valves have proven to be faster in response and actuationtime than the Sidel cylinder with Bosch valve combination. This allows the customer to speed up their machine if all ofthe nozzle cylinders are changed. However if all of the cylinders are not changed, this decreased actuation time can bea problem for the customer. The downward stroke on the cylinder is too fast and removes or traps the transfer armgripper head between the nozzle and the top of the mold. This can cause downtime on the machine, scrap bottles, anddamage the springs on the transfer arm.

PHD will provide a fixed orifice disk to be installed in the valve below the extend exhaust muffler. It is sized to match thecycle time of the Sidel standard unit on the extend cycle. (115 ms)

CYLINDER EXTEND TIME

90

95

100

105

110

115

120

0.020 0.030 0.040 0.050

ORIFICE FLOW AREA (in2)

Standard(4mm Hex)

No Restriction

TIM

E (m

Sec)

4mm HEXEXHAUST ORIFICE

EXTEND EXHAUST


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 3-9-05 PRODUCT TYPE: ML #305278 & #304450PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: PREFORM EJECT SLIDE

The existing solenoid connector is molded onto the cable. It must be cut off and rewired with the supplied connector.


The PHD Preform Eject Slide for replacement of Bosch and Festo slides on Sidel® Series2 SBO machines is a directbolt up replacement actuator. However, the valve cannot be supplied with the original connector interface. The valveconnection is not a direct bolt up. It requires rewiring and replacement of the valve connector.

Connector

PREFORM EJECT SLIDE VALVE CONNECTOR REWIRING


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 5-5-05 PRODUCT TYPE: PPC CYLINDERPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: BCS15 & 25 STRETCH ROD CYLINDERS

If your customer is experiencing intermittent rod seal leakage on either the BCS15 or 25 cylinders, remove the cylinderfrom service and check the bushing for movement. It should be flush against the inner counterbore of the head. (Seedrawing.) It will be necessary to remove the head from the cylinder.

If the bushing is not flush, remove and clean the outer diameter of the bushing and inner diameter of the bore with anappropriate degreaser. Apply Loctite Black Max (mid-viscosity 480) to the leading edge of the bushing O.D. and pressinto the bore until flush. Allow Loctite to dry and reassemble cylinder. Reference Assembly and Disassembly instructionfor Series BCS Cylinders. 6441-487 (BCS25) and 6441-486 (BCS15). These documents are available on PHD's website:www.phdinc.com


ROD BUSHING MOVEMENT

It has come to our attention that Series BCS15 and BCS25 stretch rod cylinders built before 10/15/04 have experienced,in a few isolated cases, rod bushing movement in the head of the cylinder. The problems associated with this movementtypically exhibit themselves as an intermittent rod seal leak. The bushing moves toward the rod seal and makes contactwith the inner lip of the seal causing the lip to distort and produce a leak. The cylinder is still functional at this time,however possibly running slower and inefficiently.

In even fewer cases, we have also experienced rod bushing movement where the bushing is pulled away from the rodseal into the tube of the cylinder. It will show up as a massive rod seal leak and if continued to operate, could cause rodend breakage. Both cases will allow the rods to drift downward when the air supply is removed for machine service.

Seeing a potential problem earlier in the BCZ cylinders, PHD began securing the bushings in the heads of the BCScylinders mechanically with a retaining ring on the BCS25. Loctite Black Max is used to secure the bushing in the BCS15.This upgrade was put into affect in October of 2004 as assurance of proper bushing retention.

SERIES BSC1

ROD BEARING

ROD SEAL, NOTEORIENTATION

LOCATOR

SERIES BSC2

ROD BEARING

ROD SEAL,NOTE ORIENTATION

PRESS ROD BEARINGFLUSH WITH THISSURFACE

PRESS ROD BEARING FLUSHWITH THIS SURFACE


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 7-7-05 PRODUCT TYPE: PPC CYLINDERPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES BCZ NOZZLE CYLINDERS


Design Change on BCZ Nozzle Cylinders

Effective immediately, PHD has implemented a design change to Series BCZ Nozzle Cylinders. The newdesign, BCZ2S-6, features a 2 mm longer body snout to accommodate a flange style bushing as well as theaddition of a retaining ring.

While no issues have been reported for Series BCZ Cold Set Nozzle Cylinders, this design change is beingimplemented to proactively address potential rod bushing movement as was previously identified on SeriesBCS15 and BCS25 Stretch Rod Cylinders (see TDB PPC3). Bushing replacement in the field on the newdesign should prove to be faster and more efficient since the need to use a Loctite compound to retain thebushing is no longer necessary.

None required. All incoming orders will be converted to the new units and kits. You may want to let yourcustomers know about this design change to minimize questions and confusion.

PHD will continue to support all old design, BCZ2S-5, units in the field. Please note that the old and newdesigns have different repair kit part numbers. Please make sure you order the correct kit for your customer’sdesign.

BCZ2S-5Old Design

BCZ2S-6New Design

.709[18]

LOCTITE BLACK MAXUSED TO RETAIN

SLEEVE BUSHING

.788[20]

RETAINING RINGFLANGE BUSHING

DESCRIPTIONREPAIR KIT

PART NUMBERBCZ2S-5 BCZ2S-675104-01 75827

REPAIR KIT


REQUIRED ACTION:


DATE: 10-25-05 PRODUCT TYPE: ALPS Leak Test CylinderPAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: PHD ML#304485


If your customers see that the rods are turning black or are slowing to an extent to reject good product, please reference thepreventative maintenance instructions given above.

Rod Seal LeakageIt has come to our attention that the PHD Leak Test Cylinders (ML#304485) can experience rod seal wear between 5 and 10 millioncycles. This problem is attributed to the amount of lubrication placed on the seal during initial construction of the cylinder. The sealwear exhibits itself by the rod turning black on a portion of the rod where the cylinder typically cycles through the rod seal. It may alsoexhibit itself by a slowing down of the cylinder, thereby rejecting good product. To extend the seal life and ensure proper cycling of thecylinder, additional lubrication should be applied to the rod seal.

Preventative Maintenance Lubrication InstructionsThis preventative maintenance lubrication procedure will carry the lubrication into the rod seal groove and gland and should beperformed every 2.5 million cycles.

1. Remove air pressure from the cylinder.2. Extend the rod fully by hand.3. Clean the rod with a clean towel using a light food grade mineral oil to wipe the black material from the rod.4. With the rod still fully extended, brush on a 1/16 inch thick by 1/2 inch wide patch of Dow Corning® White EP grease (#2, EP

rated, food grade grease) completely around the rod next to the mounting flange.5. Cycle the rod in and out of the cylinder by hand three or four times. Do not cycle the cylinder using air pressure, as this will

energize the seal and keep the grease from migrating into the rod seal gland.6. Repeat the application of the grease ring on the outside of the rod two more times and hand cycle actuator as described

above.7. Wipe any excess grease off of the mounting flange.

A

ASECTION A-A

FOOD GRADE LUBEIN THIS AREA

.500


REQUIRED ACTION:

TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PPC6 DATE: 1-4-06 PRODUCT TYPE:PPC Cylinder PAGE1OF1 MODEL OR SERIES:SERIES BCZ NOZZLE CYLINDER


Make sure your customers know that this advantage is now available, as air loss is a big issue for them in regards to both cost, and a capacity point of view.

3. No external dimensional changes were made.4. New cap assemblies can be ordered to replace the current

caps. Cap assemblies to be ordered using the full unit description -H1200 or part number 77170.

5. Cap repair kits include both the new and old rod seal and bushing. Cap seal only kit includes new and old rod seals.Customers can easily replace parts in their current nozzle cylinders without having to know the model number.

6. New design number to be used when placing an order: BCZ2S-7-instead of BCZ2S-6

7. An addendum to the BCZ01A catalog will be created which includes the changes from design 5 to design 7.

Design 7 Change on Series BCZ Nozzle CylindersPHD’s PPC Group has recently made new developments in Sidel Series2 blow nozzle caps sealing capability,

resulting in a new stretch rod seal and bushing in the cap assembly that will provide approximately 3X longer life than previous seal as tested in a laboratory environment.

Technical Changes from Design 6 to Design 7

1. New stretch rod seal and bushing in cap assembly will provide approximately 3X longer life than previous seal as tested in laboratory environment. As with the previous design, both the seals and bushing require food grade grease to obtain optimal life.

2. The new seal is larger and provides less friction on the stretch rod.

NEW CAP

OLD SEAL ANDSLEEvE BUSHING

NEW SEAL ANDFLANGE BUSHING

KIT NUMBER

75104-01 75827762497667675536

75102-010-06756357510375677

KIT DESCRIPTION*Unit Repair Kit**Cap Repair Kit†Cap Seal Only Kit††Tooling KitRod Locking NutFastener KitManifold KitOrifice Kit

NOTES:1)*Includes all parts to repair the full unit excluding cap parts.2)**Includes all hardware to completely repair cap.3)†Includes rod seal and grease to replace cap seal only.4)††Includes all specialized tools required to rebuild unit.

DESIGN 5 DESIGNS 6 & 7


REQUIRED ACTION:

TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PPC7 DATE: 1-05-06 PRODUCT TYPE: PPC Cylinder

PAGE 1 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: BCS25 & BCS26 Stretch Rod Cylinders


If your customer is experiencing intermittent check valve leakage on either the Series BCS25 or BCS26 Cylinders, we have two possible solutions available.

1) We developed an inline housing containing a Kepner check valve that we will exchange, free of charge, for every Deltrol. Via PHD's website, request an RGA number and order the required quantity needed for replacement. When we receive the failed Deltrol check valves, we will issue credit against the ones you have ordered. This is a simple replacement that can be done with the cylinder still mounted to the Sidel machine. Removal and mounting instructions will be supplied. This higher quality poppet style check valve should provide a longer service life, but we cannot warrant the length of life due to the dynamics and conditions of the individual machines. These conditions involve the high flow rate through the valve, centripetal force, and the individual response of the valve to vibrations and cycle rates on the machine. We believe the Kepner valve is better in this application due to the poppet style design. The poppet is supported throughout the stroke of the valve. It also has a more robust spring guide which keeps the spring from over compressing, therefore extending life. This will replace the Deltrol as our standard inline check valve in the -X23 option.

2) We have also taken the step to offer a pilot operated check valve, a more expensive solution that we do feel comfortable warranting and is the check valve specified by Sidel on the new Universal Machine. The pilot operated (PO) check valve operates in the same manner as the inline check valve. Optionally, it also allows external control of the check valve poppet. This can keep the spring and poppet from cycling each time the supply pressure drops. Vibration effects from the machine are minimized since the poppet is held firmly in place by the pilot pressure, extending the life of the check valve. Customer must modify thepneumatic circuit and control the external pilot pressure. The check valve acts as a standard check valve even if no pilot pressure is installed and still traps pressure in the cylinder to keep the stretch rod from dropping during machine shut down.

In summary, if your customers would like to replace their failed Deltrol check valve with the Kepner check valve, providing that the failed Deltrol check valve is returned to us, they will receive credit for the Kepner check valve making it free of charge. The PO check valve is a more expensive option so if they would like to replace their failed Deltrol check valve with a PO check valve, providing that the failed Deltrol check valve is returned to us, they will be required to pay only the difference between the cost of the Kepner check valve and the PO check valve.

BCS25 & BCS26 Check Valve FailureSeries BCS25 and BCS26 Stretch Rod Cylinders built incorporating the Deltrol Check valve have experienced sporadic failures in the field and we no longer have confidence in the reliability of this valve. The problems associated with these check valves have been exhibited by the stretch rod occasionally dropping during shutdown, when it should be held in the retracted position until released by the operator. The few failures we have seen have not caused poor bottle quality, nor machine crashes, but has the potential to become a safety issue should the rod come down before maintenance personnel are prepared for it.

This is not a widespread issue, but as we do not see a more reliable solution possible with the current manufacturer, we have taken the step to change suppliers.

VALVE KITSPHD UNITBCS2550BCS2650BCS2550BCS2650BCS2550BCS2650

KIT DESCRIPTIONKepner Check ValveKepner Check ValvePilot Operated Check ValvePilot Operated Check ValvePilot Operated Check Valve w/ -L12 OptionPilot Operated Check Valve w/ -L12 Option

KIT NO.772347723877236772377724477245


REQUIRED ACTION:


PAGE 2 OF 2 MODEL OR SERIES: BCS25 & BCS26 Stretch Rod Cylinders


For a period of time, customers who have not specified the LR6 option will receive an inline Kepner check valve with an installed length longer than illustrated in the catalog. Please reference chart below. After this brief period of time when stock has been fabricated, all units will be shipped to the illustrated dimension.

Due to possible interference problems existing only on the heat set machines, customers who have specified the LR6 option for heat set usage will receive an inline Kepner check valve to the cataloged specified length of 3.185 inches.

PHD UNITBCS2550BCS2650

ILLUSTRATED DIMENSION2.998 in3.185 in

ACTUAL DIMENSION3.865 in4.805 in


REQUIRED ACTION:


PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: Series1 Blow Nozzle Cylinders


Maintenance Instructions for PHD Series1 Blow Nozzle Cylinders

ML305665ML305877ML306586ML306930ML307217ML307399

We have noticed that we have been inconsistent with shipping out maintenance instructions along with our Series1 Nozzle Cylinders, and would like to make sure that you and your customers have the information needed to obtain the longest life possible out of your customers’ unit(s).

For maximum life, PHD recommends lubricating all seals which come in contact with the stretch rod every 3 months with the following lubrication: FDA Regulation 21 CFR 1789.3570.

Lubrication Procedures:

With stretch rod installed:1. Fully extend the stretch rod.2. Apply a 1/2 inch wide ring of lubricant around the outside diameter of the stretch rod just below the blow nozzle bell.3. Fully retract the stretch rod.4. Once again, fully extend the stretch rod once and wipe away the excess lube from it.

With stretch rod removed:1. With a small brush or similar device, apply a small amount of lubricant to inside surface of the stretch rod seal(s).

As machine set-ups and conditions vary, PHD Inc. cannot guarantee the same extended life will be seen as that resulting from PHD’s own lab testing of the stretch rod seal.

Inform current and potential customers of the recommended lubrication of Series1 Nozzle Cylinders’ stretch rod seals.


REQUIRED ACTION:

TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: CL1 DATE: 4-18-06 PRODUCT TYPE: CLAMPS PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES PLM


CATALOG PLM01 CORRECTION ON PAGE 6Switch Cable Connection Direction

NOTES:1) ALL DIMENSIONS ARE REFERENCE ONLY UNLESS SPECIFICALLY TOLERANCED2) ALL METRIC DIMENSIONS [ ] ARE GIVEN IN MILLIMETERS 1 mm = .03937 in

PS(R)4D1 = M12 X 1 CABLE CONNECTIONPS(R)4E1 = M12 X 1 CABLE CONNECTIONPS(R)4F1 = M12 X 1 CABLE CONNECTION

PS(R)4A9 = 1/2-20 UNF CABLE CONNECTIONPS(R)4D9 = M12 X 1 CABLE CONNECTIONPS(R)4E9 = M12 X 1 CABLE CONNECTIONPS(R)4F9 = M12 X 1 CABLE CONNECTION

.157 [4.0] HEXFINGER EXTENDED SWITCH(ADJUSTABLE)

2X .197 [5.0] HEXSWITCH HOUSING

SWITCH HOUSING CAN MOVETO DIMENSIONS SHOWN

90°

3.441[87.4]

4.088[103.8]3.733[94.8]

.874[22.2]

MAX

.160[4.1]

MAX .160[4.1]

MAX

1.530[38.9] MAX

Please keep a copy of this page with your PLM01 catalog and be sure your customers are ordering the cable connection designation correctly. If it was ordered incorrectly, the instructions are included to adjust the connector.

There is a mistake on page 6 of the PLM01 catalog. The switch cable connection direction is called out incorrectly in the dimensional drawing on the bottom of the page. The Ordering Data is correct, but the data on page 6 is incorrect. The (1) is for the connector to be parallel to the mounting surface and the (9) is for the connector to be perpendicular to the mounting surface. The highlighted areas shown below are the affected information. We have also included instructions in the event you need or wish to change the cable connector direction.

LOOSEN THE TWO M6 SHCS(IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO

REMOVE THEM COMPLETELY)

-Pxxx9 SHOWN

STEP 3

STEP 1 STEP 2

STEP 4 -Pxxx1 SHOWN

SLIDE SWITCH COVERUP BY .100-.150" APPROX

LOOSEN SHCSON SWITCH

MOVE SWITCH TO NEW POSITIONTHEN TIGHTEN SWITCH SHCS

SLIDE SWITCH COVER BACKONTO CLAMP BODY

TIGHTEN THE TWOM6 SHCS TO 85 in-lb

Procedure to Change Direction of Cable Connection


REQUIRED ACTION:


PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: Series BCS Stretch Rod Cylinder


New Option -X26 Replaces Option -X23

The -X23 option, which includes the PHD/Kepner check valve, is no longer being offered.

It is being replaced with an -X26 option, which includes a Norgren check valve, model T55C4800. This check valve is identical to the one the majority of the customers use or have used on their Bosch stretch rod cylinders, so its performance capability is known to most of them. This check valve will not be covered under the PHD warranty umbrella, and any quality issues will need to be brought before Norgren.

PHD highly recommends that those of you with orders awaiting shipment, to confirm approval from your customers with regard to this change, before we ship your units. Everyone should inform customers that this change has occurred.

-X26 OPTION


TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G18 DATE: 7-1-09 PRODUCT TYPE: Grippers

MODEL OR SERIES: GrK


GrK Grippers Have Higher Grip Forces than previously Cataloged

The following information is revised grip force data for the recently released Series GRK Pneumatic Grippers. PHD has incorporated a new surface treatment and lubrication technology that reduces the friction in the internal jaw mechanism and thus significantly increases the grip force. This provides PHD a greater advantage in the marketplace.

Catalogs, animation software, and sizing software will be revised in the next few weeks. In the meantime, please use the following grip force information when comparing PHD to Schunk or when specifying the GRK Grippers in highly competitive situations.

Change in cataloged grip force (zero tooling length at 87 psi):

PAGE 1 OF 2

(continued on next page)

GrK Gripper published Actual percent size Grip Force Grip Force increase

35 x 6.5 121 159 31%

35 x 12 63 86 37%

46 x 8 223 292 31%

46 x 16 108 146 35%

58 x 10.5 350 454 30%

58 x 20 179 239 34%

75 x 12.5 624 805 29%

75 x 26 282 378 34%

Total Close Grip Force at 87 psi (lb)

reQUireD ACTiON:Inform potential customers for GRK Grippers of this grip force increase.


TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: G18 DATE: 7-1-09 PRODUCT TYPE: Grippers

MODEL OR SERIES: GrK


100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

0

LONG TRAVEL UNIT GRIP FORCE

Tooling Length (mm)

0 20 40 60 80 100 120

Gri

p Fo

rce

(lb)

0 20 40 60 80 100 120

180

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Gri

p Fo

rce

(lb)

SHORT TRAVEL UNIT GRIP FORCE

Tooling Length (mm)

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

Gri

p Fo

rce

(lb)

Tooling Length (mm)

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

Gri

p Fo

rce

(lb)

Tooling Length (mm)

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

Gri

p Fo

rce

(lb)

Tooling Length (mm)

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180

500

450

400

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

Gri

p Fo

rce

(lb)

Tooling Length (mm)

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180

450

400

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

Gri

p Fo

rce

(lb)

Tooling Length (mm)

0 50 100 150 200 250

900

800

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

0

Gri

p Fo

rce

(lb)

Tooling Length (mm)

0 50 100 150 200 250

GRK35

GRK46

GRK58

GRK75

Originally Cataloged Currently Shipping

PAGE 2 OF 2


TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PHDP1 DATE: 12-21-11 PRODUCT TYPE: PHD PLus

MODEL OR SERIES: ECV, EsK/EsL, EsG


PAGE 1 OF 3

REQUIRED ACTION:Please contact PHD Customer Service for additional assistance if required.

Engineering Data, Life Charts and EquationsSee changes below.Page 6:

WEIGHT AND INERTIAL CALCULATIONS: TOTAL WEIGHT = WOT + (WLT x TRAVEL) + MOTOR MOUNT WEIGHT TOTAL MOVING WEIGHT = WOM + (WLM x TRAVEL) + EXTERNAL PAYLOAD

FOR -Qx11: INERTIA Reflected = JO + (JL x TRAVEL) + (JM x TOTAL MOVING WEIGHT) + JQ FOR -QF21: INERTIA Reflected = [JO + (JL x TRAVEL) + (JM x TOTAL MOVING WEIGHT)] / 4 + JQ

INER

TIA

ACTUATOR @ ZERO STROKE (JO) lb-in2 [kg-m2] 0.010 [3.00 x 10-6] 0.051 [1.50 x 10-5] 0.165 [4.84 x 10-5]LENGTH ADDER (JL) lb-in2/in [kg-m2/mm] 0.0009 [9.85 x 10-9] 0.0025 [2.90 x 10-8] 0.0069 [7.95 x 10-8]MOVING WEIGHT ADDER (JM)

lb-in2/lb 9.63 x 10-4 3.85 x 10-3 3.85 x 10-3 9.86 x 10-3 3.85 x 10-3 1.54 x 10-2

[kg-m2/kg] [6.21 x 10-7] [2.48 x 10-6] [2.48 x 10-6] [6.36 x 10-6] [2.48 x 10-6] [9.93 x 10-6]

MOTOR CONFIGURATION (JQ)

-QF11lb-in2 [kg-m2]

0.048 [1.40 x 10-5] 0.161 [4.71 x 10-5] 0.159 [4.65 x 10-5]-QF21 0.094 [2.75 x 10-5] 0.283 [8.28 x 10-5] 0.654 [1.91 x 10-4]-QL11 0.011 [3.14 x 10-6] 0.021 [6.11 x 10-6] 0.138 [4.04 x 10-5]

Page 24:

Page 38:

Pages 6, 24, & 38

INER

TIA

ACTUATOR @ ZERO STROKE (JO) lb-in2 [kg-m2] 0.010 [3.00 x 10-6] 0.051 [1.50 x 10-5] 0.165 [4.84 x 10-5]LENGTH ADDER (JL) lb-in2/in [kg-m2/mm] 0.0009 [9.85 x 10-9] 0.0025 [2.90 x 10-8] 0.0069 [7.95 x 10-8]

MOVING WEIGHT ADDER (JM)

lb-in2/lb 9.63 x 10-4 3.85 x 10-3 3.85 x 10-3 9.86 x 10-3 3.85 x 10-3 1.54 x 10-2

[kg-m2/kg] [6.21 x 10-7] [2.48 x 10-6] [2.48 x 10-6] [6.36 x 10-6] [2.48 x 10-6] [9.93 x 10-6]


-QF11lb-in2 [kg-m2]

0.048 [1.40 x 10-5] 0.161 [4.71 x 10-5] 0.159 [4.65 x 10-5]-QF21 0.094 [2.75 x 10-5] 0.283 [8.28 x 10-5] 0.654 [1.91 x 10-4]-QL11 0.011 [3.14 x 10-6] 0.021 [6.11 x 10-6] 0.138 [4.04 x 10-5]

INER

TIA

ACTUATOR @ ZERO STROKE (JO) lb-in2 [kg-m2] 0.010 [3.00 x 10-6] 0.051 [1.50 x 10-5] 0.051 [1.50 x 10-5]LENGTH ADDER (JL) lb-in2/in [kg-m2/mm] 0.0009 [9.85 x 10-9] 0.0025 [2.90 x 10-8] 0.0025 [2.90 x 10-8]

MOVING WEIGHT ADDER (JM)

lb-in2/lb [kg-m2/kg]

9.63 x 10-4 3.85 x 10-3 3.85 x 10-3 9.86 x 10-3 3.85 x 10-3 9.86 x 10-3

[6.21 x 10-7] [2.48 x 10-6] [2.48 x 10-6] [6.36 x 10-6] [2.48 x 10-6] [6.36 x 10-6]


-QF11lb-in2 [kg-m2]

0.048 [1.40 x 10-5] 0.161 [4.71 x 10-5] 0.161 [4.71 x 10-5]-QF21 0.094 [2.75 x 10-5] 0.283 [8.28 x 10-5] 0.283 [8.28 x 10-5]-QL11 0.011 [3.14 x 10-6] 0.021 [6.11 x 10-6] 0.021 [6.11 x 10-6]





PAGE 2 OF 3


0

- 100 Million Inches [2500 km] Life- 200 Million Inches [5000 km] Life

0



00 1.968

[50]

00

00

44.96

67.44[300]

78.68[350]

56.20[250]

[200]

33.72[150]

22.48[100]

11.24[50]

3.937[100]

5.905[150]

7.874[200]

9.842[250]

11.811[300]

13.780[350]

15.748[400]

17.716[450]

3.937[100]

7.874[200]

11.811[300]

15.748[400]

78.68[350]

67.44[300]

56.20[250]

44.96[200]

33.72[150]

22.48[100]

11.24[50]

0

67.44[300]44.96[200]

22.48[100]

134.9[600]112.4[500]

89.92[400]

179.85[800]

202.32[900]

157.36[700]

1.968[50]

3.937[100]

5.905[150]

7.874[200]

9.842[250]

11.811[300]

13.780[350]

15.748[400]

17.716[450]

67.44[300]44.96[200]22.48[100]

134.9[600]112.4[500]89.92[400]

202.32[900]

179.85[800]

157.36[700]

224.81[1000]

3.937[100]

7.874[200]

11.811[300]

15.748[400]

0

44.96[200]

134.9[600]

89.92[400]

179.85[800]

224.81[1000]

269.77[1200]

314.73[1400]

1.968[50]

3.937[100]

5.905[150]

7.874[200]

9.842[250]

11.811[300]

13.780[350]

15.748[400]

17.716[450]

19.685[500]

21.653[550]

44.96[200]

134.9[600]

89.92[400]

179.85[800]

224.81[1000]

269.77[1200]

314.73[1400]

3.937[100]

7.874[200]

11.811[300]

15.748[400]

19.685[500]

00

0.002[.05]

0.004[.10]

0.01[.25]

0.019[.50]

0.029[.75]

0.039[1]

0.078[2]

0.118[3]

0.002[.05]

0.004[.10]

0.01[.25]

0.019[.50]

0.029[.75]

0.039[1]

0.078[2]

0.118[3]

0.002[.05]

0.004[.10]

0.01[.25]

0.019[.50]

0.029[.75]

0.039[1]

0.078[2]

0.118[3]

Page 26:





PAGE 3 OF 3





0

67.44[300]

44.96[200]

22.48[100]

89.92[400]

00

67.44[300]

44.96[200]

22.48[100]

89.92[400]

1.968[50]

3.937[100]

5.905[150]

7.874[200]

9.842[250]

11.811[300]

13.780[350]

15.748[400]

17.716[450]

21.653[550]

19.685[500]

23.622[600]

3.937[100]

7.874[200]

11.811[300]

15.748[400]

19.685[500]

23.622[600]

00

0 1.968[50]

3.937[100]

5.905[150]

7.874[200]

9.842[250]

11.811[300]

13.780[350]

15.748[400]

17.716[450]

21.653[550]

19.685[500]

23.622[600]

0

67.44[300]

44.96[200]

22.48[100]

134.9[600]

112.4[500]

89.92[400]

202.32[900]

179.85[800]

157.36[700]

67.44[300]

44.96[200]

22.48[100]

134.9[600]

112.4[500]

89.92[400]

202.32[900]

179.85[800]

157.36[700]

224.81[1000]

00

247.29[1100]

3.937[100]

7.874[200]

11.811[300]

15.748[400]

19.685[500]

23.622[600]

44.96[200]

134.9[600]

89.92[400]

179.85[800]

224.81[1000]

269.77[1200]

314.73[1400]

44.96[200]

134.9[600]

89.92[400]

179.85[800]

224.81[1000]

269.77[1200]

359.69[1600]

0 1.968[50]

3.937[100]

5.905[150]

7.874[200]

9.842[250]

11.811[300]

13.780[350]

15.748[400]

17.716[450]

21.653[550]

19.685[500]

23.622[600]

0 3.937[100]

7.874[200]

11.811[300]

15.748[400]

19.685[500]

23.622[600]

25.590[650]

27.559[700]

27.559[700]

0

314.73[1400]

0.002[.05]

0.004[.10]

0.01[.25]

0.019[.50]

0.029[.75]

0.039[1]

0.078[2]

0.118[3]

0.002[.05]

0.004[.10]

0.01[.25]

0.019[.50]

0.029[.75]

0.039[1]

0.078[2]

0.118[3]

0.002[.05]

0.004[.10]

0.01[.25]

0.019[.50]

0.029[.75]

0.039[1]

0.078[2]

0.118[3]

Page 27:


TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: R10 DATE: 2-20-12 PRODUCT TYPE: ROTARY ACTUATORS

MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES RFS


PAGE 1 OF 1

REQUIRED ACTION:Update your information so that when recommending or specifying rotary actuators on future projects the Series RFS Rotary Actuators will not be used in a horizontal-inverted orientation.

Series RFS Application Unit Orientation Recommendation/Warning

The Series RFS Rotary Actuators are designed to be used with the rotary table in a horizontal – up attitude or with the rotary table in a vertical attitude as shown below. PHD does not recommend the Series RFS Rotary Actuators in applications where the rotary table is horizontal-inverted also shown below.

For applications requiring a horizontal-inverted rotary, contact PHD Unique Solutions for specifications of available units.

Acceptable

Vertical Horizontal - Up Horizontal - Inverted

Acceptable Not Acceptable

LOAD LOADLOAD


BULLETIN NUMBER: G19 DATE: 6-25-12 PRODUCT TYPE: Grippers

MODEL OR SERIES: Grr pArALLeL


PAGE 1 OF 2

REQUIRED ACTION:

New -STT99 Coupled Jaw Position Sensor Option

This option has the same functional performance as the -SPP99 option, except it is mechanically coupled and must be specified when the order is placed. This option cannot be added to the unit at a later time.

The catalog pdf file has been updated online to reflect this addition. Below is the pertinent information (highlighted) about the -STT99 Jaw Position Sensor option.

Inform potential customers about this new option and make them aware of the updated pdf on PHD’s website. Refer to CAT-GRR.pdf

TO ORDER SPECIFY:Product Line, Series, Type, Synchronization, Jaw, Design No., Size, Total Jaw Travel, and Options required.

2 -63 x1RRG

PRODUCT LINEG - Gripper

SERIESRegular Duty

TYPELong Travel,

High Capacity,Parallel Gripper

SYNCHRONIZATION0 - Non-synchronized1 - Synchronized2 - Non-synchronized independently powered jaws

JAWStyle 2

- 6

DESIGN NO.(See Note 1)2 - Imperial6 - Metric

-

BORE SIZE MINIMUM TOTAL JAW TRAVEL150 = 150 mm (5.906 in)200 = 200 mm (7.874 in)250 = 250 mm (9.843 in)350 = 350 mm (13.780 in)


PORT OPTIONS

200 Z1 - H47


JAW TRAVEL LIMITING OPTIONSGRR02, GRR12 & GRR22

ANxxx - Jaw travel limitation on open,both jaws

ATxxx - Jaw travel limitation on closed,both jaws GRR02 & GRR22 ONLY

APxxx - Jaw travel limitation on open,Jaw A only

AQxxx - Jaw travel limitation on open,Jaw B only

ARxxx - Jaw travel limitation on closed,Jaw A only

AUxxx - Jaw travel limitation on closed,Jaw B only

OPEN POSITION

CLOSED POSITION

15

AA26

99

3748

JAW B

JAW A

Total Jaw Travel = (Open position - Closed Position)

NOTES:1) Design number indicates imperial

or metric mounting holes and ports. Dowel pin holes are metric regardless of design number.

2) Standard unit is Rodlok ready.3) Available on GRR1 only. GRR1 unit

is SPP99 ready.4) Available on GRR1 only. -STT99

option must be ordered with the gripper. Only sensor replacement kits are available.

L9 - NPT Ports (metric units only)UNIT OPTIONS

H47 - Rodlok (See Note 2)V1 - Fluoro-Elastomer Seals

except for Rodlok mechanismZ1 - Corrosion resistant coating on

exposed parts except for Rodlok mechanism and Rodlok rod

SENSOR OPTIONSSPP99 - Rotary jaw position sensor

installed (see Note 3)STT99 - Coupled rotary jaw position

sensor installed (see Note 4)

SERIES GRR ORDERING DATA

REPLACEMENT STT99 JAW POSITION SENSOR KITS

KIT STANDARDCORROSION RESISTANT

Sensor Replacement Kit 84404-11 84404-12Kit includes 1 jaw position sensor, 2 mounting screws, 1 seal and spring


BULLETIN NUMBER: G19 DATE: 6-25-12 PRODUCT TYPE: Grippers

MODEL OR SERIES: Grr pArALLeL


Ø 2.000 [Ø 51.0] MIN HOLETO ALLOW REMOVAL OFPOSITION SENSOR

mm161.919.036.5254

LETTERDIMJ8

SP1SP2SP3

in6.375.7481.43710.000

GRRx2-x-63

MODEL NUMBER

+ VDC (PIN 1)

SIGNAL OUT (PIN 2)

GROUND (PIN 3)

CONNECTORINTERFACE

3mm HEX SIZE

1

MALE QUICK CONNECT

SP1

J8

Ø 1.500 [Ø 38.1] MIN HOLETO PROVIDE CLEARANCE FORPOSITION SENSOR

SP3

[M8 X 1]THREAD

Ø SP2

3

5

2

6

4

PAGE 2 OF 2

RESOLUTIONResolution of sensor installed into gripper is 0.001 inch

[0.025 mm] in conjunction with an analog control module having 15 bits or greater input resolution.

REPEATABILITYMaximum variation of reported grip dimension when repeatedly

gripping the same object is ±0.002 in [±0.05 mm].

ENVIRONMENTALTemperature Limits: -20 to 180°F [-28 to 82°C]

IP67 compliant when installed in gripper.

ELECTRICALSupply Voltage: 15-30 VDC, reverse polarity protected Output Voltage: 0-10 VDC, short-circuit protected Output Constant: 663 ± 1mV/inch [26.10 ± 0.04 mV/mm] of grip changeOutput Voltage Offset: <10mV typicalOutput Linearity: ± 0.3%

STT99 COUPLED JAW POSITION SENSOR


BULLETIN NUMBER: SW21 DATE: 6-25-12 PRODUCT TYPE: SWitcheS and SenSorS

MODEL OR SERIES: VarioUS, See chart


REQUIRED ACTION:

Legacy Switches and Cordsets

Over the years, PHD has accumulated a variety of legacy switches and cordsets which currently have minimal sales volume. This is the result of new switch designs and technology and corresponding actuators which have been obsoleted over the years. PHD has made the determination to obsolete and no longer manufacture these switches.

To address this, PHD will implement a two phase plan. Phase 1 affects the group of switches which will be obsoleted immediately. Phase 2 affects the group of switches which will be obsoleted over a period of time. PHD will address the plan for this group at a later date.

The chart on the following page lists the PHD switches and cordsets to be obsoleted. Also shown is a cross-reference to a comparable switch or cordset which can be used in lieu of the obsoleted product in the majority of situations.

For the customers who would prefer to purchase any of the obsoleted products, PHD will offer a one time, first come offering of all remaining inventory. Following this email, PHD will send each distributor a list of customers who have purchased these items in the past two years. Please contact these accounts to advise them of the impending obsolescence and confirm if they would like to order any of the remaining inventory. Concerning the cordsets specifically, in addition to PHD, these can be purchased from many mill supply and electrical houses.

Orders will be accepted until September 1, 2012. After this date, any remaining inventory will be purged from PHD.

For additional assistance or to check available inventory, please contact PHD Customer Service.

Please contact your customers to advise them of the impending obsolescence and confirm if they would like to order any of the switches and cordsets remaining in inventory.

PAGE 1 OF 2



MODEL OR SERIES: VarioUS, See chart


PAGE 2 OF 2

SWITCH CORDSET BRACKET17502-2-06

17522-2 63549-xx17503-2-06

17523-2 63549-xx17504-2-06

17524-2 63549-xx17509-3-06

17529-3 63549-xx53602-2-02

53622-2 63549-xx53604-1-02

53624-1 63549-xx53606-1-02

53626-1 63549-xx55802-1-02

55822-1 63549-xx55804-1-02

55824-1 63549-xx62505-1-02

62515-1 61397-xx62506-1-02

62516-1 61397-xx62507-1-02

62517-1 61397-xx62526-1 KILL 62516-1 61397-xx

CABLED 17509-3-06 17000-xx-xQUICK CONNECT 17529-3 63549-xx 17000-xx-x

15900-1 15903-xx-xx 5142-xx-xCABLED 17502-2-06 17000-xx-x

QUICK CONNECT 17522-2 63549-xx 17000-xx-x17502-2-06 17000-xx-x

17522-2 63549-xx 17000-xx-x18430-002-05 KILL18431-002-05 KILL9799-01-0100 KILL9799-01-0200 KILL9800-01-0100 KILL9800-01-0200 KILL15903-00-06 KILL15903-00-20 KILL15903-90-06 KILL15903-90-20 KILL15904-00-06 KILL15904-90-06 KILL

61398-02 KILL61398-05 KILL

Note: Alternate may not work in all applications due to differing cable length.

CORDSET

15903-00-1215903-00-1215903-90-1215903-90-1215904-00-1215904-90-12

18430-002-0218430-002-02

61397-xx61397-xx

PROX

SET POINT MODULE

9800-01-0300PRODUCT DOES NOT HAVE A REPLACEMENT

9800-01-03009800-01-0400

APPLICATION NO LONGER SUPPORTED120V AC: CURRENT LIMITING ALLOWED120V AC: CURRENT LMTNG NOT ALLW'D

24V DC

CABLEDQUICK CONNECT

KILL CABLEDQUICK CONNECTQUICK CONNECT

REEDAB12 KILL

240V AC

16383-1-06 KILL

6250

62505-1-05 KILL CABLEDQUICK CONNECT


62507-1-05

558055802-1-05 KILL CABLED

QUICK CONNECT


KILL CABLEDQUICK CONNECT


17509-3-20 KILLCABLED

QUICK CONNECT

5360


53604-1-05


QUICK CONNECT


QUICK CONNECT

SERIES PART NUMBER STATUSALTERNATE PRODUCT

APPLICATION / OPTION

1750


QUICK CONNECT


TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: OPT1 DATE: 4-25-16 PRODUCT TYPE: PHD OPTIMAX®

MODEL OR SERIES: OCG


PAGE 1 OF 1

REQUIRED ACTION:No action required.

Series OCG Cylinder Switch Bracket Change Model: Optimax® Series OCG using:• Switch bundle• Bracket part number 86999

This change affects the switch bracket used with the Optimax® Cylinder only. The switch bracket changes from a molded plastic housing to cast zinc. The new bracket simplifies installation and eliminates small loose parts.



MODEL OR SERIES: SWitch BracKet #5142-xx-x


REQUIRED ACTION:

Legacy Large Bore Switch Brackets

PHD has made the determination to no longer manufacture switch brackets sold for use on 1-1/2" to 4" bore NFPA Cylinders. This decision is based on low usage of these brackets that are used solely with old design legacy/obsolete switches. The chart below specifies the bracket part numbers as well as the associated extrusion.

Please contact these accounts and confirm their interest in purchasing. Orders will be accepted until October 1, 2012. After this date all remaining inventory will be purged. For additional assistance or to check availability, please contact PHD Customer Service.

PAGE 1 OF 1

Bracket Part Number Qty. Available Raw Extrusion Part Number Ft. Available

5142-51-1 30 5109 38'

5142-52-1 2 5110 73'

5142-53-1 4 5111 20'

5142-54-1 0 5113 0

5142-55-1 15 5112 0

5142-56-1 51 7329 0

5142-51-0 21 9344 173'

5142-52-0 2 9345 0

5142-53-0 0 9346 0

5142-54-0 0 9348 0

5142-55-0 30 9347 217'

5142-56-0 0 7329 0

5142-51-3 16 9344 173'

5142-52-3 1 9345 0

5142-53-3 0 9346 0

5142-54-3 0 9348 0

5142-55-3 7 9347 217'

5142-56-3 0 7329 0

PHD will offer a one time, first come-first serve offering on all remaining inventory. Following this email, PHD will send each distributor as applicable a list of customers who have purchased these switch brackets during the last 2 years.


BULLETIN NUMBER: SW23 DATE: 3/2/2015 PRODUCT TYPE: SWitcheS and SenSorS

MODEL OR SERIES: SWitch ModeL 13109-02-6


REQUIRED ACTION:

Phase Out of 13109-02-6 3 Amp Reed Switch

PHD will cease manufacturing and sale of the 13109-02-6 proximity switch once current inventory is depleted.

Recommended Replacement:PHD recommends using the Series 15901-1, 3 Amp Reed (TRIAC) along with the appropriate 5142-xx-3 Switch Bracket and cordset number 15903-xx-x. As this switch is no longer cataloged the engineering information is included with this bulletin.

Inform affected customers of this upcoming change and the replacement switch available. For additional assistance or to check availability, please contact PHD Customer Service.

PAGE 1 OF 3

ORDERING DATA: SERIES 1590 SWITCHES

CORDSETSTO ORDER SPECIFY:

SENSINGCIRCUITRY DESCRIPTION

1-1 3 AMP AC Reed

Type, Sensing Circuitry,and Design No.

1-11590NOTES:1) Cordsets for quick connect

switches must be orderedseparately.

2) Other cable lengths available.Consult PHD.

TYPEReed PART NO.

15903-00-12

15903-90-12

DESCRIPTION12 ft [3.6 m] Cordset for ReedSwitch, Straight Connector12 ft [3.6 m] Cordset for ReedSwitch, 90° Connector





BENEFITS

■ Reed Switches are suitable for use on most Tom Thumb/PHD products.

■ Adjustable mounting allows switches to be located anywhere within range of piston travel.

■ Several switches may be mounted to control or initiate any sequence function.

■ Liquid Resistant Switches can be used in applications where coolant or moisture due to washdown is present (IEC IP67 rating). Consult PHD for compatibility with caustic or hazardous liquids.

■ No externally moving parts to wear or maintain.

■ Suited for use in plant environments where dirt and contamination create difficulties for electromechanical and other types of controls.

■ LED provides convenient means for positioning and trouble-shooting switch and circuits.

■ 3 Amp Switch provides internal transient protection under normal conditions (AC only).

The PHD 15901-1 Reed Switch operates on AC current. They are ideal for use as inputs for many types of sequencers and programmable controllers. In some cases they can be used to drive some relays or valve solenoids.

The 3 Amp Switch is very similar to the Reed Switch in construction. The difference is the inclusion of a triac which upgrades the contact rating to 3 amps. The 3 Amp Switch also has built-in protection against electrical transients.

15901-1 3 AMP REED SWITCH (TRIAC)SPECIFICATIONS 15901-1OPERATING PRINCIPLE Magnetic ReedACTUATED BY Piston MagnetINPUT VOLTAGE 65 to 120 VAC (50/60 Hz)VA MAX. 360CURRENT (BREAK) 3 AmpLEAKAGE 1.7 mA.RESPONSE TIME 1.5 ms On, 0-8.3 ms OffLED INDICATOR Visible throughout voltage rangeENVIRONMENTAL IP67OPERATING TEMP. 0° to 80°C

NOTE: All incandescent loads derate switch capacity to 10% due to inrush current. Consult PHD for higher load requirement for the 3 Amp switch.

REED WIRING SCHEMATICS15901-1 AC ONLY

LOAD

SWITCH

PIN 2

PIN 3

NEUTRAL

LINE

117VAC

PIN ASSIGNMENT

LED

PIN 2

PIN 1

PIN 3

PAGE 2 OF 3

DIMENSIONS: SERIES 1590 SWITCHES1.280[32.5]

.763[19.4]

1.411[35.8]

.500[12.7]

.572[14.5]3° TYP

1/2-20 [12 mm] THREADFOR CORDSETREED SWITCHES USE 3 POLE





DIMENSIONS: 5142-xx-3 SWITCH BRACKET

1.050[26.7]

SWITCH BRACKET DOES NOTEXTEND BEYOND CYLINDEROUTLINE ON THIS SIDE

.312[7.9]

1.062 [27]

1.094[27.8]

1.280 [32.5]

SERIES1000 & 20003000 & 40005000 & 60007000 & 8000MINIATURE

DESCRIPTIONStrain Relief Kit for use with LargeBore Cylinder Switch Brackets

PART NO.18412

LIQUID RESISTANT SWITCH

STRAIN RELIEF KITSROTARY & MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS

NPG

METRIC1925293519293551752935

EA, EL,& NEA

AV & HV

SERIES

CYLINDERSBORE SIZE

IMPERIAL3/41

1-1/81-3/83/4

1-1/81-3/8

23

1-1/81-3/8

METRIC——————

LIQUID RESISTANT5142-51-35142-52-35142-53-35142-55-35142-56-3

—

LARGE BORE CYLINDERSBORE SIZE

IMPERIAL1-1/2

22-1/2

3-1/4*4

5, 6, & 8

LIQUID RESISTANT5142-31-35142-32-35142-33-35142-34-35142-35-35142-36-35142-37-35142-40-35142-41-35142-33-35142-36-3

LINEAR SECTION5142-36-35142-37-35142-40-35142-41-35142-35-3

ROTARY SECTION5142-32-35142-34-35142-38-35142-39-3

—

*3-1/4" Bore C & C Cylinders require switchbracket 5142-54-3

SWITCH CORDSETS1.141

[29.0] MAX

1.718[43.6]

Ø 1/4 [6.4] CORD

1590x-00-xx STRAIGHTCONNECTOR CORDSET 1.203

[30.5] MAX

LED INDICATOR REF

Ø 1/4 [6.4] CORDCORD WILL EXTEND FROM SWITCH ONTHE LED SIDE OF THE SWITCH

1590x-90-xx90° CONNECTOR CORDSET

PAGE 3 OF 3

DESCRIPTIONstraight connector90° connector

TYPE OF SWITCHREEDREED

PHD CORDSETPART NO.

15903-00-1215903-90-12

DANIEL WOODHEADPART NO.

7021570219

JOYPART NO.

5000 114-35000 114-6

LUMBERGPART NO.

RKT 3U-618/12FRKWT 3U-618/12F

NOTE: PHD reserves the right to supply any of the cordsets listed.

PIN/WIRE COLOR ASSIGNMENT FOR PHD, DANIEL WOODHEAD, JOY, AND LUMBERG CORDSETS

3 POLEPIN ASSIGNMENT

1 GREEN 2 RED WITH BLACK TRACER 3 RED WITH WHITE TRACER

32

1

3 WIRE

FACE VIEW OF PLUGS



MODEL OR SERIES: Jc1StP


REQUIRED ACTION:

Environmental Protection for PHD Teachable Switches If the JC1STP teachable switches are used in an environment were the switch is exposed to solvents the programmer housing could swell or become soft and sticky. To prevent this, use clear polyolefin heat shrink tubing to increase switch life.

The potting material used in the programmer housing of the PHD JC1STP teachable switch performs well in many automotive, commercial, and consumer chemical environments, but it is sensitive to strongly polar solvents as well as strong acids and bases. Denatured alcohol is an example of a polar solvent, gasoline is not. When attacked, the potting material softens and swells, eventually causing switch failure.

Polyolefin heat shrink tubing can extend the life of the switch programmer housing in these environments. It is low cost, readily available and easy to field install. Clear polyolefin heat shrink tubing with large shrink ratios is needed. Two suitable sizes of clear, adhesive lined, semi-rigid polyolefin, 4:1 heat shrink tubing may be ordered from McMaster-Carr in small quantities:

P/N 2735K11 – marked Raychem ES1000-1-2x6, .225" exp. - .050" rec.

P/N 2735K12 – marked Raychem ES1000-2-2x6, .293" exp. - .065" rec.

A three inch minimum length of tubing is used to protect the programmer housing. The small diameter tubing works best but the large size is easier to slip over the housing. Life in the most aggressive test solvent is greatly extended compared to an unprotected switch.

The switch remains programmable without removing the tubing. Because the heat shrink tubing is semi-rigid but still relatively soft, care must be taken when operating the switch push button. Use a 2.5 mm ball end hex wrench and slow, steady pressure to activate the programmer button and the switch can be reprogrammed without damaging the tubing.

No action required.

PAGE 1 OF 1


BULLETIN NUMBER: C16 DATE: 12-9-14 PRODUCT TYPE: CYLINDERS

MODEL OR SERIES: Series CM Cylinder


PAGE 1 OF 1

REQUIRED ACTION:

Discontinuing Series CMx Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder

PHD is discontinuing the Series CMx Magnetically Coupled Rodless Cylinder effective immediately due to low demand.

Complete units and replacement parts are available until depleted from current inventory, after which no additional parts will be manufactured.


Advise affected customers of this discontinuation


BULLETIN NUMBER: M5 DATE: 6/30/2015 PRODUCT TYPE: MULTI-MOTION ACTUATORS

MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES MCS


REQUIRED ACTION:

Discontinuing Series MCS Multi-Motion ActuatorsPHD is discontinuing the Series MCS Multi-Motion Actuators effective immediately due to low demand.Complete units and replacement parts are available until they are depleted from current inventory, after which no additional parts will be manufactured.


Advise affected customers of this discontinuation.

PAGE 1 OF 1


TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL37 DATE: 11-30-12 PRODUCT TYPE: SLideS

MODEL OR SERIES: SeRieS SG


PAGE 1 OF 1


Design Change to Metric Series SG Slides (9)

The rod coupler that attaches the cylinder rod to the saddle has been redesigned to reduce the backlash on the metric SG slides with -H11 and -H12 options. The new coupler will not interchange with the old design coupling assembly. The saddle requires a different pocket (in Design 9), causing different part numbers for the saddle and new coupling parts. Options -H11 and -H12 require these parts and that is why the design number has been changed on all the SG metric units (on standard metric units, the CV cylinder rod still mounts directly to the saddle.)

TO ORDER SPECIFY:Product, Series, Type, Design No.,Size, Travel, and Options.

NOTES:1) All units are shock ready as standard. Shock absorber kits

are ordered separately. See option page for completeordering information.

2) Shock absorber on retraction is not available with UB2xoption (port position 2).

3) Shock absorbers are not plated with -Z1 option.4) Options -BB and -BR are not available with

shock absorbers.5) Rodlok must be ordered separately when a

replacement cylinder option -H4 is specified with -H47unit. See option page for Rodlok kits.

6) Cushions and port controls are available on -DB and -PBoptions only (locations 1 and 5) on 3-position units.

TYPEB

CD

- Standard linear ball bushing,standard shaft

- TC bushing, standard shaft- TC bushing, oversize shaft

SIZE1

2

3

4

5

6






- 40 mm bore cylinder with25 mm shaft standard,30 mm shaft oversizeS - Slide

PRODUCT

- VDMA/ISO cylinder ready32 and 40 mm bore

- ISO 6432 cylinder ready16, 20, and 25 mm bore

H11

H12

WITHOUT CYLINDER OPTIONS

-H11 and -H12 are available on designnumber 9 metric units only.

DBDEDRH4EMU6U7


DBDEDRH4H47L9EM

PB

PEPRUBxx

WITH CYLINDER OPTIONS- Cushion controls both direction (Standard in location 1 & 5) (See note 6)- Cushion control extend only (Standard in location 1)- Cushion control retract only (Standard in location 5)- Cylinder replacement only (See note 5)- Rodlok cylinder with locking device adaptor (Not available on size 1)- NPT ports (NPT-standard on imperial units BSPP-standard on metric units)- Series 1750 Solid State magnetic piston (Available on size 1 only)- Magnetic piston for Series 1750 Switches on size 41 and 91. Magnetic piston

for Series 6250 Switches on sizes 42/92 through 46/96.- Port controls both directions (Standard locations are 1 & 5, not available on

size 1) (See note 6)- Port control extend only (Standard in location 1, not available on size 1)- Port control retract only (Standard in location 5, not available on size 1) - Optional port locations (N/A on 3-position units)

Standard ports, cushion controls, and port controls are located in positions 1 & 5.Sizes 2 and 3 use 10-32 [M5] ports when combined with port controls on thesame surface.

SHOCK ABSORBER KITSPHD SHOCK

ABSORBER NO.57858-07-x57858-01-x57858-02-x

SLIDEMODEL

SGxx1, SGxx2SGxx3

SGxx4, SGxx5, SGxx6

x – –

49

- Imperial- Metric

x

E - 3 position cylinder(specify only if needed)

THREE POSITION UNIT

MID-POSITION TRAVELSpecify for 3 position units.

Travel from retract position 1to mid-position 2.

DESIGN NO.

GS B 4 3 6 DB – M – PB

SERIESG - Gantry

BB – Q1 – Z1

SLIDE OPTIONS- Shock Pad both directions- Shock Pad on extension- Shock Pad on retraction- Proximity Switch ready both ends*- Saddle mounting in position number 4- Saddle mounting in position number 1

(Not available on sizes 1, 2, 3 slides)- Lube fitting in saddle port position 2 and 4- Lube fitting in saddle port position 3- Corrosion-resistant guide shafts (ends unplated)- Electroless nickel plated ferrous metal parts

*Switches must be ordered separately.

BBBEBRCBGXGY

L4L6Q1Z1

Available in 1/4" increments.Total slide travel fromretract position 1 toextend position 3.

SLIDE TRAVELIMPERIAL UNITS

41 - 1" to 12"42 - 1" to 12"43 - 1" to 16"44 - 1" to 20"45 - 1" to 24"46 - 1" to 36"

SLIDESIZE

SLIDE TRAVELMETRIC UNITS

91 - 25 mm to 305 mm92 - 25 mm to 305 mm93 - 25 mm to 405 mm94 - 25 mm to 510 mm95 - 25 mm to 610 mm96 - 25 mm to 915 mm

Available in 5 mm increments.Total slide travel fromretract position 1 toextend position 3.

SLIDESIZE

DESCRIPTIONDC Inductive Proximity Switch8 mm Threaded Current Sinking (NPN)DC Inductive Proximity Switch8 mm Threaded Current Sourcing (PNP)

MODEL NUMBER

51422-005-02

51422-006-02

INDUCTIVE PROXIMITY SWITCHES

E 3


TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: SL38 DATE: 5-2-14 PRODUCT TYPE: SLIDES

PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES SJP


REQUIRED ACTION:Advise affected customers of this discontinuation

Discontinuing Series SJP Slides

PHD is discontinuing the Series SJP Slides. These slides have been available on a ML basis for several years.

Complete units and replacement parts are available until depleted from current inventory after which no additional parts will be manufactured.

Replacement seals will still be available if the seals are used commonly with other product lines. Any seals unique to the SJP will be subject to availability and inventory depletion.

Customers looking for replacements can refer to the Series SHP and SIP slides for similarly configured units as they offer newer technology in more robust and cost effective packages.



BULLETIN NUMBER: G20 DATE: 5-2-14 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS

MODEL OR SERIES: 8400 PARALLEL


PAGE 1 OF 1

REQUIRED ACTION:

Discontinuing Series 8400 Parallel Grippers

PHD is discontinuing the original Series 8400 "baseball diamond" style parallel gripper. This does not include the current Series 8400 Angular Grippers which are still available. The 8400 Parallel Grippers have been available on a ML basis for several years.

Complete units and replacement parts are available until depleted from current inventory after which no additional parts will be manufactured.

Replacement seals will still be available if the seals are used commonly with other product lines. Any seals unique to the 8400 will be subject to availability and inventory depletion.

Customers looking for replacements can refer to the Series GRH, GRL, GRK grippers for similarly configured units as they offer newer technology in more robust and cost effective packages.




BULLETIN NUMBER: G21 DATE: 12-9-14 PRODUCT TYPE: GRIPPERS

MODEL OR SERIES: Series EGP Gripper


PAGE 1 OF 1

REQUIRED ACTION:

Discontinuing Series EGP Electromechanical Gripper

PHD is discontinuing the Series EGP Electromechanical Gripper effective immediately due to low demand.

Complete units and replacement parts are available until depleted from current inventory, after which no additional parts will be manufactured.




REQUIRED ACTION:


PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: Series BCS Stretch Rod Cylinder


New Molded Seal for -X27 Option

PHD part number 85662 (Rev B) is a seal used in the –X27 option on the Series BCS Stretch Rod Cylinders.

PHD switched from a machined seal to a molded seal. The color of the material has changed from black to yellow. The molded seal provides more consistency.

PHD has lab and field-tested the new molded seal with results showing the same superior performance as the previous seal.

PHD recommends that distributors with Series BCS Stretch Rod Cylinder customers should inform them of this change.

NEW YELLOWQUICK EXHAUSTSEAL



MODEL OR SERIES: SWitch BracKet #5142-xx-x


REQUIRED ACTION:

Discontinuing Series 5142 Switch Brackets

Please contact affected accounts and confirm their interest in purchasing. Orders will be accepted until October 1, 2016. After this date, all remaining inventory will be purged. For additional assistance or to check availability, please contact PHD Customer Service.

PAGE 1 OF 1

Bracket Part Number Quantity Available

5142-31-0 0

5142-31-1 0

5142-31-3 7

5142-32-1 0

5142-33-0 6

5142-33-1 4

5142-33-3 0

5142-34-0 10

5142-34-1 9

5142-34-3 0

5142-35-0 0

5142-35-1 0

5142-35-3 4

5142-36-0 8

5142-36-1 0

5142-36-3 2

5142-37-0 29

5142-37-1 0

5142-37-3 10

5142-38-0 6

5142-38-1 0

5142-38-3 4

5142-39-0 0

5142-39-1 0

5142-39-3 3

5142-40-0 0

5142-40-1 0

5142-40-3 7

5142-41-0 0

5142-41-1 0

5142-41-3 0

PHD is no longer manufacturing 5142 switch brackets sold for use on Classic Series 1590 Switches effective 8/1/16. This decision is based on low demand of these brackets which are used solely with old design legacy/obsolete switches.

Replacement switches for these brackets are still available. However, for those customers requiring both a replacement switch and obsoleted bracket, PHD recommends transitioning to the Series 1750 Switch. Please contact customer service for more information.

The chart specifies the obsoleted bracket part numbers that are available until inventory is depleted.

PHD is providing a first come, first serve offering on all remaining inventory. Following this notification, PHD will send each applicable distributor a list of customers who have purchased these switch brackets during the last two years.


REQUIRED ACTION:


PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: Series FCA Filler Cylinder


Discontinuing Series FCA Filler Cylinder

PHD is discontinuing the Series FCA Filler Cylinder effective 8/1/16 due to low demand. Replacing the Series FCA is the Series FCB Filler Cylinder, a drop-in replacement for use with MAC bullet valves as well as the OEM valve and the MAC OEM replacement valve. PHD will continue to support Series FCA field unit repairs indefinitely. For more information on the Series FCB Filler Cylinder, visit http://litstore.phdinc.com/pdf.asp?filename=CPFCB.pdf.

Discontinued Series FCA Filler Cylinder New Series FCB Filler Cylinder

Please advise affected customers of this discontinuation.



MODEL OR SERIES: #15561-xxx


REQUIRED ACTION:

Discontinuing Series 15561-xxx 12 mm Threaded DC Inductive Proximity Switch

None.

PAGE 1 OF 1

12 mm THREADED

PHD PART NO. BALLUFF PART NO. CABLE LENGTH TYPEDIMENSIONS

A mm B mm C mm D mm

15561-001 BES-516-329-BO-C3 3M DC SINK (NPN) 60 M12 x 1 17 40.5

15561-002 BES-516-325-BO-C3 3M DC SOURCE (PNP) 60 M12 x 1 17 40.5

15561-003 BES-516-207-BO-E3 3M AC 60 M12 x 1 17 40.5

PHD is no longer offering the Series 15561-xxx Threaded DC Inductive Proximity Switch. Similar switches are readily available from Balluff and many other suppliers. The chart below shows the switch dimensions.

If the application is unknown, replacement switches should have a body length no greater than 60 mm and a minimum M12 x 1 thread length of 40.5 mm. Fully threaded switch bodies within the length limits will also work. Many applications will be able to use longer body switches and even quick connects, but these must be reviewed on an individual basis since we cannot know what other components might be in the way in these applications.

The discontinued switch has a cable length of three meters. Many replacement switches will offer 2 or 5 meter cable lengths. Be sure to have sufficient length for the application.


BULLETIN NUMBER: CL2 DATE: 7-19-17 PRODUCT TYPE: CLAMPS

MODEL OR SERIES: SERIES PLK DESIGN 2 AND 6


REQUIRED ACTION:Please contact affected accounts and notify them that the design has been updated with a drop-in replacement that offers additional pin style and diameters than the previous design. Make sure your internal purchasing/order placement staff are aware of this change.

PAGE 1 OF 1

PLK DESIGN 2 (6) FEATURES

• 2 Strokes (5 mm & 10 mm)• Imperial (2) or Metric (6) Ports• Pin Diameters 12.00 thru 30.00

(+.00/-.02 mm tolerance)• 3 Pin Styles (B, C & N)• Standard Flange Mount Height (110 mm

to 140 mm in 0.5 mm increments)• 4 Standard Finger Directions (easily

changed in the field)• Standard Single Finger and Dual Finger• Port Position 1 through 4 available

with all positional sensing options• Port Fittings (-LAA & LBB)• Cylinder sensor flag and rod options

(-R01 & R02)• Cylinder Switch Options

(SW00, 41, 42, 51 & 52)• Rear Mounting Options (-B01 thru -B06)• Lock Setting (-MT00 thru -MT40)

Additional Benefits• Completely enclosed design• NAAMS mounting• Interchangeable pin sizes, styles

and heights• Positional sensing available• Self-locking threads throughout

NEW!PART SUPPORT FLANGE

35°

2X

ØØ

N STYLE PIN C STYLE PINB STYLE PIN

(RADIUS)(RADIUS)

(PIN Ø)

(STROKE)

DROP-IN FORDESIGN 1(5)

NEW PIN STYLE NEW PIN STYLE

(35°)

1.185[30.1]1.227

[31.2]

1.181[30.0]

1.319[33.5]

1.240[31.5]

0.731[18.6]

2.246[57.0]

0.471[12.0]

0.949[24.1] 0.669

[17.0]0.755[19.2]

1.122[28.5]

PIN Ø = PIN Ø SPECIFIED = +0.00 / -0.02 mm (+0.0000 / -0.0008 in)PIN Ø AVAILABLE FROM 12.00 mm TO 30.00 mmALL DIMENSIONS ARE REFERENCE ONLY UNLESS SPECIFICALLY TOLERANCED.

PHD Series PLK Pin Locating Clamps have been updated. This new drop-in replacement offers more pin styles and pin diameters, providing the flexibility to meet application requirements in a standard package.

The final day to order old design (1/5) units as standard is 8/14/2017. After this date the old design will be processed and priced as an ML unit.

New Series PLK Design Replaces Design 1 and 5


TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PPC12 DATE: 9-26-17 PRODUCT TYPE: PPC TRANSFER ARM

PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: BST2x2


PRODUCTS AFFECTED:BST2S2-5-1 x 90 – (options)BST2D2-5-1 x 90 – (options)

PRODUCTS NOT AFFECTED:BST2S3-5-1 x 90 – (options)BST2D3-5-1 x 90 – (options)

BACKGROUND:Design modifications have been added to the current Series2 Sidel Transfer Arm. A change was made to add a 2x2 linear cam bearing which will change from one-piece cam follower to bearing + thru-shaft + washers + locking nut design as shown below. We recommend replacing the existing units in the field if the cam bearing wheel assembly shown in the picture below (left) has started to become loose or unstable.

REQUIRED ACTION:Please notify affected customers that have the old design.

BST2x2-5 Cam Bearing Wheel Replacement


TECHNICAL DATA BULLETIN NUMBER: PPC13 DATE: 11-1-17 PRODUCT TYPE: PPC nozzle Cylinder

PAGE 1 OF 1 MODEL OR SERIES: BCz2S-7 & BCz2d-7


ProdUCTS AFFeCTed:BCZ2S-7-80 x 45 – (options)BCZ2D-7-80 x 43 – (options)75827 KIT; BCZ2S7 REPAIR75104-02 KIT; BCZ2D, REPAIR, DBL. STAGE76249 KIT; BCZ2X, CAP REPAIR76676 KIT; BCZ, REPAIR, ROD SEAL

BACKGroUnd:In March 2017 PHD released Design 8 of the BCZ2 Sidel Series2 Nozzle Cylinder. This new design is a drop-in replacement for the Design 7 nozzle. The Design 7 nozzle and associated rebuild kits are now discontinued. Design 7 units in the field can be rebuilt with Design 8 kits. All Design 7 units sent in for the Rebuild Program will be rebuilt as Design 8.

reQUired ACTion:Please notify affected customers that have the old design.

discontinuing design 7 of BCz2 Sidel Series2 nozzle Cylinders and Kits

Documents

ACTIVE INDEX - Sign in to the PHD Distributor Support Sitedistributor.phdinc.com/PDF/TDB.pdf · Catalog 2005 Updates ... Rod Bushing Movement ... ACTIVE INDEX PHD TECHNICAL DATA BULLETINS